Operation & Maintenance Manual

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Compact Excavator
S/N AG3N14000 & Above

© 2018 Bobcat Company.

6990448enUS (07-18) (F) Printed in U.S.A. All rights reserved.
NA iT4-K

1 of 246
 OPERATOR SAFETY WARNING
Operator must have instructions before operating the machine. Untrained
WARNING operators can cause injury or death.
W-2001-0502

Safety Alert Symbol: This symbol with a warning statement, means: “Warning, be alert! Your safety
is involved!” Carefully read the message that follows.

CORRECT WRONG CORRECT WRONG

P-90216 NA1418 NA1435B NA1419

Never operate without Do not grasp control Never operate without Avoid steep areas or
instructions. handles when entering approved cab / canopy. banks that could break
cab / canopy. away.
Read machine signs, and Never modify equipment.
Operation & Maintenance Be sure controls are in
Manual, and Operator’s neutral before starting. Never use attachments
Handbook. not approved by Bobcat
Sound horn and check Company.
behind machine before
starting.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

WRONG WRONG CORRECT CORRECT


 Maximum
NA1439A NA1445A Maximum NA1449B NA1447B

Use caution to avoid Keep bystanders out of Never exceed a 15 slope Never travel up a slope
tipping - do not swing maximum reach area. to the side. that exceeds 15.
heavy load over side of
track. Do not travel or turn with
bucket extended.
Operate on flat, level
ground. Never carry riders.

CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT

STOP

Maximum

NA1448B 6808261 B-21928 NA1421A

NA1435B
Never exceed 25 when To leave excavator, lower Fasten seat belt securely. Look in the direction of
going down or backing the work equipment and rotation and make sure
up a slope. the blade to the ground. Operate controls only no bystanders are in the
from operator’s seat. work area.
Stop the engine.
SAFETY EQUIPMENT
The Bobcat® excavator must be equipped with safety items necessary for each job. Ask your Bobcat dealer for information
on the availability and safe use of attachments and accessories.
1. SEAT BELT: Check belt fasteners and check for damaged webbing or buckle.
2. OPERATOR CAB / CANOPY (ROPS and TOPS): Check condition and mounting hardware.
3. OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK: Must be in the cab / canopy.
4. LEFT HAND CONSOLE: When raised must deactivate the travel and hydraulic functions.
5. SAFETY SIGNS (DECALS): Replace if damaged.
6. GRAB HANDLES: Replace if damaged.
7. INTEGRATED SLEW LOCK BRAKE. OSW66-0117
8. SAFETY TREAD.: Replace if damaged.

2 of 246
 CONTENTS

CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

SAFETY AND TRAINING RESOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

SYSTEM SETUP AND ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

ALPHABETICAL INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

REFERENCE INFORMATION

Write the correct information for YOUR Bobcat excavator in the spaces below. Always use these numbers when
referring to your Bobcat excavator.

Excavator Serial Number

Engine Serial Number

NOTES:

YOUR BOBCAT DEALER:

ADDRESS:

PHONE:

Bobcat Company Doosan Bobcat EMEA s.r.o.

P.O. Box 128 U Kodetky 1810
Gwinner, ND 58040-0128 263 12 Dobris
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA CZECH REPUBLIC

3 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

3 of 246
 FOREWORD

This Operation & Maintenance Manual was written to give the owner / operator instructions on the safe operation
and maintenance of the Bobcat excavator. READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING YOUR BOBCAT EXCAVATOR. If you have any questions, see your Bobcat
dealer. This manual may illustrate options and accessories not installed on your excavator.

BOBCAT COMPANY IS IS0 9001 CERTIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

REGULAR MAINTENANCE ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Excavator Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Engine Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

EXCAVATOR IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

FEATURES, ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Standard Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Options And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Buckets Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Falling-Object Guards (FOGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Special Applications Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Special Applications Kit Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

4 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

4 of 246
BOBCAT COMPANY IS IS0 9001 CERTIFIED

ISO 9001 is an international standard that specifies requirements for a quality management system that controls the
processes and procedures which we use to design, develop, manufacture, and distribute Bobcat products.

British Standards Institute (BSI) is the Certified Registrar Bobcat Company chose to assess the company’s compliance
with the ISO 9001 at Bobcat's manufacturing facilities in Gwinner, North Dakota (U.S.A.), Pontchâteau (France), and the
Bobcat corporate offices (Gwinner, Bismarck, and West Fargo) in North Dakota. TÜV Rheinland is the Certified Registrar
Bobcat Company chose to assess the company’s compliance with the ISO 9001 at Bobcat’s manufacturing facility in
Dobris (Czech Republic). Only certified assessors, like BSI and TÜV Rheinland, can grant registrations.

ISO 9001 means that as a company we say what we do and do what we say. In other words, we have established
procedures and policies, and we provide evidence that the procedures and policies are followed.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

state of California to cause cancer, birth defects and other
reproductive harm.

REGULAR MAINTENANCE ITEMS

ENGINE OIL FILTER (6 Pack)  BATTERY

6675517 6670251

FUEL FILTER HYDRAULIC FILL / BREATHER CAP

6667352 6692836

AIR FILTER, Outer  FLUID, Hydraulic / Hydrostatic

6666375
6903117 - (2.5 U.S. gal)
AIR FILTER, Inner 1 6903118 - (5 U.S. gal)
6666376 6903119 - (55 U.S. gal)

PRIMARY HYDRAULIC FILTER ANTI-FREEZE, Propylene Glycol

6670207 
CASE DRAIN HYDRAULIC FILTER 6983128 - Premixed
6516722 6983129 - Concentrate

HVAC AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED) RADIATOR CAP

Fresh Air 7176099 6646678
Recirculation 7222791
ENGINE OIL  GEAR LUBE 6903121 - HD 80W90 (12 qt)
6903105 SAE 15W40 CE/SG (12 qt) ENGINE OIL 
6903107 SAE 10W30 CE/SG (12 qt) SAE 15W40 CE/SG (1 U.S. gal)
SAE 30W CE/SG (12 qt) 6903106
6903109 6903108 SAE 10W30 CE/SG (1 U.S. gal)
6903110 SAE 30W CE/SG (1 U.S. gal)
6903113 SAE 15W40 CE/SG (2.5 U.S. gal)
6903112 SAE 10W30 CE/SG (2.5 U.S. gal)
6903111 SAE 30W CE/SG (2.5 U.S. gal)

NOTE: Always verify Part Numbers with your Bobcat dealer.

5 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

5 of 246
SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS

Always use the serial number of the excavator when requesting service information or when ordering parts. Early or later
models (identification made by serial number) may use different parts, or it may be necessary to use a different procedure
in doing a specific service operation.

Excavator Serial Number DELIVERY REPORT

Figure 1 Figure 3

P-97099A B-16315

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

The excavator serial number plate (Item 1) [Figure 1] is The delivery report [Figure 3] contains a list of items that
located on the frame of the machine in the location must be explained or shown to the owner or operator by
shown. the dealer when the Bobcat excavator is delivered.

Engine Serial Number The delivery report must be reviewed and signed by the
owner or operator and the dealer.
Figure 2

P-97220

The engine serial number (Item 1) [Figure 2] is located

on the top cover.

6 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

6 of 246
EXCAVATOR IDENTIFICATION

24
2
3 24
1
4 15 16

14
17 23
6
5 13

10 18
12
7

8
22
11 11
9 21
20 NA5028A
19 NA5029A

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 Operation & Maintenance Manual and Operator’s 16 CAB (ROPS / TOPS AND FOPS) [2]
Handbook
2 Arm Cylinder 17 Rear Cover
3 Auxiliary Quick Couplers 18 Counterweight
4 Boom 19 Tracks
5 Arm 20 Tie Downs / Lift Points (Both Sides)
6 Bucket Cylinder 21 Track Frame
7 Bucket Link 22 Blade
8 X-Change™ 23 Right Side Cover
9 Bucket [1] 24 Mirrors
10 Boom Cylinder
11 Tie Downs
12 Blade Cylinders
13 Upperstructure
14 Control Levers (Joysticks)
15 Operator’s Seat with Seat Belt

[1]BUCKET - Several different buckets and other attachments are available for the Bobcat excavator.
[2] ROPS / TOPS - (Roll-Over Protective Structure / Tip-Over Protective Structure) as standard equipment. The ROPS / 
TOPS meets ISO 12117-2 and ISO 12117.

7 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

7 of 246
FEATURES, ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS

Standard Items Attachments

Model E50 Bobcat excavators are equipped with the These and other attachments are approved for use on
following standard items: this model Bobcat excavator. Do not use unapproved
attachments. Attachments not manufactured by Bobcat
• 1960 mm (77.2 in) Dozer Blade may not be approved.
• Canopy with ROPS / TOPS Approval
• 400 mm (15.7 in) Rubber Tracks The versatile Bobcat excavator quickly turns into a multi-
job machine with a variety of attachments.
• Two-Speed Travel
• Auto-Shift Drive System See your Bobcat dealer for information about approved
• Auxiliary Hydraulics (With Selectable Auxiliary attachments and attachment Operation & Maintenance
Hydraulic Flow) Manuals.
• Hydraulic and Travel Control Lockouts
• Auger
• Engine Speed Control Dial With Auto Idle Feature
• Breaker
• Blade Float
• Hydraulic Clamp
• Work Lights - Boom and Frame Mounted
• Pro Clamp™ System
• Engine and Hydraulic system Monitor with Shut Down
• 3-Tined Grapple
• Horn
• Compactor
• Hydraulic Joystick Controls
• Grading Blade
• ISO / STD Control Pattern Selection Feature
• Power Tilt
• Suspension Seat
• Ripper
• Retractable Seat Belt
• Hydro tilt

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• Spark Arrester Muffler
• Packer wheel
• Advanced Diagnostics
• Trencher
• X-Change™
• Lazer Receiver
• Counterweight

Options And Accessories

Buckets Available
Below is a list of some equipment available from your
Bobcat excavator dealer as Dealer and / or Factory
Installed Accessories and Factory Installed Options. See
your Bobcat dealer for other available options,
accessories and attachments.

• Enclosed Cab With Heater and A/C

• Enclosed Cab With Heater BUCKET
• Deluxe Instrument Panel
• Travel Motion Alarm
• Keyless Start Many bucket styles, widths and different capacities are
• Canopy / Cab Mounted Lights available for a variety of different applications. See your
• Catalytic Exhaust Purifier Bobcat dealer for the correct bucket for your Bobcat
• Top Guard Kit (FOGS) excavator and application.
• Special Application Kit
• Steel Tracks - 400 mm (15.7 in) • 305 mm (12 in) Trenching
• Long Arm • 330 mm (13 in) Trenching
• Angle Blade • 457 mm (18 in) Trenching
• Direct to Tank Auxiliary Hydraulics • 610 mm (24 in) Trenching
• Counterweight (Additional) • 610 mm (24 in) Heavy duty trenching
• Hydraulic X-Change • 760 mm (30 in) Trenching
• Pin Grabber Quick Coupler • 914 mm (36 in) Trenching
• Boom Load Hold • 914 mm (36 in) Heavy duty trenching
• Arm Load Hold • 1321 mm (52 in) Grading
• Overload Warning Alarm
• Second Auxiliary Hydraulics
• Arm Mounted Auxiliary Hydraulic Couplers Specifications subject to change without notice and
• HEPA HVAC Fresh Air Filter standard items may vary.

8 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

8 of 246
FEATURES, ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Falling-Object Guards (FOGS) Special Applications Kit

Figure 4 Figure 5

OVERHEAD SPECIAL
GUARD APPLICATION
KIT

NA1557

Available for special applications that require protection

from smaller objects that can fall on the canopy / cab or

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

restrict material from entering canopy / cab openings
[Figure 4] and [Figure 5].

The excavator must have the overhead guard [Figure 4]

installed to meet the top guard requirements in ISO
10262. NA1560A

See your Bobcat Dealer for more information.

The excavator must have the special applications kit
[Figure 5] installed to meet the front guard requirements
in FOGS ISO 10262 - level 1.

Kit includes an upper and lower screen guard.

See your Bobcat Dealer for more information.

Special Applications Kit Inspection And Maintenance

The Special Applications Kit must be regularly inspected

and maintained. Inspect the screen for damage. Replace
parts as necessary.

9 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

9 of 246
 SAFETY AND TRAINING RESOURCES

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Safe Operation Is The Operator’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Safe Operation Needs A Qualified Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Avoid Silica Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Spark Arrester Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Welding And Grinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

PUBLICATIONS AND TRAINING RESOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Pictorial Only Safety Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

10 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

10 of 246
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS • An Operator’s Handbook is fastened to the operator
cab of the excavator. Its brief instructions are
Before Operation convenient to the operator. The handbook is available
from your dealer in an English edition or one of many
Carefully follow the operating and maintenance other languages. See your Bobcat dealer for more
instructions in this manual. information on translated versions.

The Bobcat excavator is highly maneuverable and • The AEM Safety Manual delivered with the machine
compact. It is rugged and useful under a wide variety of gives general safety information.
conditions. This presents an operator with hazards
associated with off highway, rough terrain applications, • The Compact Excavator Operating Training Course is
common with Bobcat excavator usage. available through your Bobcat dealer. This course is
intended to provide rules and practices of correct
The Bobcat excavator has an internal combustion engine operation of the Bobcat excavator. The course is
with resultant heat and exhaust. All exhaust gases can available in English and Spanish versions.
kill or cause illness so use the excavator with adequate
ventilation. • Service Safety Training Courses are available from
your Bobcat dealer. They provide information for safe
The dealer explains the capabilities and restrictions of and correct service procedures.
the Bobcat excavator and attachment for each
application. The dealer demonstrates the safe operation • See the PUBLICATIONS AND TRAINING
according to Bobcat instructional materials, which are RESOURCES Page in this manual or your Bobcat
also available to operators. The dealer can also identify dealer for Service and Parts Manuals, printed
unsafe modifications or use of unapproved attachments. materials, videos, or training courses available. Also

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

The attachments and buckets are designed for a Rated check the Bobcat websites Bobcat.com/training or
Lift Capacity. They are designed for secure fastening to Bobcat.com
the Bobcat excavator. The user must check with the
The dealer and owner / operator review the
dealer, or Bobcat literature, to determine safe loads of
recommended uses of the product when delivered. If the
materials of specified densities for the machine -
owner / operator will be using the machine for a different
attachment combination.
application(s) he or she must ask the dealer for
recommendations on the new use.
The following publications and training materials provide
information on the safe use and maintenance of the
Bobcat machine and attachments:

• The Delivery Report is used to assure that complete

instructions have been given to the new owner and
that the machine and attachment is in safe operating
condition.

• The Operation & Maintenance Manual delivered with

the machine or attachment gives operating
information as well as routine maintenance and
service procedures. It is a part of the machine and can
be stored in a container provided on the machine.
Replacement Operation & Maintenance Manuals can
be ordered from your Bobcat dealer. Call Before You Dig
• Machine signs (decals) instruct on the safe operation
Dial 811 (USA Only)
and care of your Bobcat machine or attachment. The 1-888-258-0808 (USA & Canada)
signs and their locations are shown in the Operation
& Maintenance Manual. Replacement signs are When you call, you will be directed to a location in your
available from your Bobcat dealer. state / province, or city for information about buried lines
(telephone, cable TV, water, sewer, gas, etc.).

SI EXC-1016

11 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

11 of 246
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) Safe Operation Needs A Qualified Operator
Safe Operation Is The Operator’s Responsibility For an operator to be qualified, he or she must not use
drugs or alcoholic drinks which impair alertness or
coordination while working. An operator who is taking
Safety Alert Symbol prescription drugs must get medical advice to determine
if he or she can safely operate a machine.
This symbol with a warning statement means:
A Qualified Operator Must Do The Following:
“Warning, be alert! Your safety is involved!”
Carefully read the message that follows. Understand the Written Instructions, Rules and
Regulations
• The written instructions from Bobcat Company
include the Delivery Report, Operation &
Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook, Safety
WARNING Manual and machine signs (decals).
• Check the rules and regulations at your location. The
Operator must have instructions before operating the rules may include an employer’s work safety
machine. Untrained operators can cause injury or requirements. Regulations may apply to local driving
death. requirements or use of a Slow Moving Vehicle (SMV)
W-2001-0502 emblem. Regulations may identify a hazard such as a
utility line.
Have Training with Actual Operation
• Operator training must consist of a demonstration and
IMPORTANT verbal instruction. This training is given by your

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Bobcat dealer before the product is delivered.

This notice identifies procedures which must be • The new operator must start in an area without
followed to avoid damage to the machine. bystanders and use all the controls until he or she can
I-2019-0284 operate the machine and attachment safely under all
conditions of the work area. Always fasten seat belt
before operating.
• Operator Training Courses are available from your
Bobcat dealer in English and Spanish. They provide
DANGER information for safe and efficient equipment
operation. Safety videos are also available.
• Service Safety Training Courses are available from
The signal word DANGER on the machine and in the your Bobcat dealer. They provide information for safe
manuals indicates a hazardous situation which, if not and correct service procedures.
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Know the Work Conditions
D-1002-1107
• Know the weight of the materials being handled.
Avoid exceeding the Rated Lift Capacity of the
machine. Material that is very dense will be heavier
than the same volume of less dense material. Reduce
WARNING the size of load if handling dense material.
• The operator must know any prohibited uses or work
The signal word WARNING on the machine and in the areas, for example, he or she needs to know about
manuals indicates a potentially hazardous situation excessive slopes.
which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious • Know the location of any underground lines. Call local
injury. utilities or the TOLL FREE phone number found in the
W-2044-1107
Before Operation section of this manual.
• Wear tight fitting clothing. Always wear safety glasses
The Bobcat excavator and attachment must be in good when doing maintenance or service. Safety glasses,
operating condition before use. respiratory equipment, hearing protection or Special
Check all of the items on the Bobcat Service Schedule Applications Kits are required for some work. See
Decal under the 8-10 hour column or as shown in the your Bobcat dealer about Bobcat safety equipment
Operation & Maintenance Manual. for your model.
SI EXC-1016

12 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

12 of 246
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS (CONT’D) FIRE PREVENTION

Avoid Silica Dust

Maintenance

The machine and some attachments have components

that are at high temperatures under normal operating
conditions. The primary source of high temperatures is
the engine and exhaust system. The electrical system, if
Cutting or drilling concrete containing sand or rock damaged or incorrectly maintained, can be a source of
containing quartz may result in exposure to silica dust. arcs or sparks.
Do not exceed Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL) to
silica dust as determined by OSHA or other job site Rules Flammable debris (leaves, straw, etc.) must be removed
and Regulations. Use a respirator, water spray or other regularly. If flammable debris is allowed to accumulate, it
means to control dust. Silica dust can cause lung disease can cause a fire hazard. Clean often to avoid this
and is known to the state of California to cause cancer. accumulation. Flammable debris in the engine
compartment is a potential fire hazard.

The operator’s area, engine compartment and engine

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

cooling system must be inspected every day and cleaned
if necessary to prevent fire hazards and overheating.

All fuels, most lubricants and some coolant mixtures are

flammable. Flammable fluids that are leaking or spilled
onto hot surfaces or onto electrical components can
cause a fire.

Operation

Do not use the machine where exhaust, arcs, sparks or

hot components can contact flammable material,
explosive dust or gases.

Electrical

Check all electrical wiring and connections for damage.

Keep the battery terminals clean and tight. Repair or
replace any damaged part or wires that are loose or
frayed.

Battery gas can explode and cause serious injury. Use

the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual
for connecting the battery and for jump starting. Do not
jump start or charge a frozen or damaged battery. Keep
any open flames or sparks away from batteries. Do not
smoke in battery charging area.

SI EXC-1016

13 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

13 of 246
FIRE PREVENTION (CONT’D) Welding And Grinding

Hydraulic System Always clean the machine and attachment, disconnect

the battery, and disconnect the wiring from the Bobcat
Check hydraulic tubes, hoses and fittings for damage controllers before welding. Cover rubber hoses, battery
and leakage. Never use open flame or bare skin to check and all other flammable parts. Keep a fire extinguisher
for leaks. Hydraulic tubes and hoses must be properly near the machine when welding.
routed and have adequate support and secure clamps.
Tighten or replace any parts that show leakage. Have good ventilation when grinding or welding painted
parts. Wear dust mask when grinding painted parts.
Always clean fluid spills. Do not use gasoline or diesel Toxic dust or gas can be produced.
fuel for cleaning parts. Use commercial nonflammable
solvents. Dust generated from repairing nonmetallic parts such as
hoods, fenders or covers can be flammable or explosive.
Fueling Repair such components in a well ventilated area away
from open flames or sparks.

Fire Extinguishers

Stop the engine and let it cool before adding fuel. No

smoking! Do not refuel a machine near open flames or

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

sparks. Fill the fuel tank outdoors.

Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) poses a greater static

ignition hazard than earlier diesel formulations with
higher Sulfur content. Avoid death or serious injury from
fire or explosion. Consult with your fuel or fuel system Know where fire extinguishers and first aid kits are
supplier to ensure the delivery system is in compliance located and how to use them. Inspect the fire
with fueling standards for proper grounding and bonding extinguisher and service the fire extinguisher regularly.
practices. Obey the recommendations on the instructions plate.

Starting

Do not use ether or starting fluids on any engine that has

glow plugs or air intake heater. These starting aids can
cause explosion and injure you or bystanders.

Use the procedure in the Operation & Maintenance

Manual for connecting the battery and for jump starting.

Spark Arrester Exhaust System

The spark arrester exhaust system is designed to control

the emission of hot particles from the engine and exhaust
system, but the muffler and the exhaust gases are still
hot.

Check the spark arrester exhaust system regularly to

make sure it is maintained and working properly. Use the
procedure in the Operation & Maintenance Manual for
cleaning the spark arrester muffler (if equipped).

Sl EXC-1016

14 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

14 of 246
PUBLICATIONS AND TRAINING RESOURCES

The following publications are also available for your For the latest information on Bobcat products and the
Bobcat excavator. You can order them from your Bobcat Bobcat Company, visit our Web site at Bobcat.com/
dealer. training or Bobcat.com.

OPERATION & OPERATOR’S

MAINTENANCE MANUAL HANDBOOK

6990448enUS 6990434enUS

Complete instructions on the correct operation and the Gives basic operation instructions and safety warnings.
routine maintenance of your Bobcat excavator.

OPERATOR SAFETY
SAFETY MANUAL
DVD

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

6901951 (English and
6904762 (English and
Spanish)
Spanish)

Gives basic safety procedures and warnings for your DVD gives basic safety instructions for many Bobcat
Bobcat excavator. products including excavators.

COMPACT EXCAVATOR
EXCAVATOR
OPERATOR TRAINING
SERVICE SAFETY
COURSE
TRAINING COURSE
7249283 (English)
6900916
7249286 (Spanish)

Introduces operator to step-by-step basics of skid-steer Introduces service technicians to step-by-step basics of
excavator operation. proper and safe skid-steer excavator maintenance and
servicing procedures.

EXCAVATOR SAFETY
VIDEO
SERVICE MANUAL
(Mobile device with
6989441enUS
quick response code
application required)

Complete maintenance instructions for your Bobcat Scan the code above to watch the excavator safety video
excavator. or view at Bobcat.com/training.

15 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

15 of 246
MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS)

Follow the instructions on all the Machine Signs (Decals) that are on the excavator. Replace any damaged machine signs
and be sure they are in the correct locations. Machine signs are available from your Bobcat excavator dealer.

OPERATOR’S
HANDBOOK

7161794 6810004 (If Equipped)

7236492

7148147
LEFT CONSOLE AREA
6990434enUS
W/O ANGLE BLADE 7240698
WITH ANGLE BLADE 7240699 7178179

RIGHT CONSOLE AREA

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

7148145

6594897

7195361 7152748

7168039

7238017

7178178

NA5028A

16 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

16 of 246
MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS) (CONT’D)

Follow the instructions on all the Machine Signs (Decals) that are on the excavator. Replace any damaged machine signs
and be sure they are in the correct locations. Machine signs are available from your Bobcat excavator dealer.

7188426 - W/ Standard Arm

7178177 7148157
7188442 - W/ Standard Arm W/
INSIDE CANOPY INSIDE CAB Counterweight
7188428 - W / long arm
7169014

6732148
6708929 X-Change:
Pin-On 6818059
Hydraulic 7220131

Pin Grabber Quick

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Coupler 7220038
7238472

7185933
7120570 7160880

7185932

7238018 6595014 (2)

2

7169291
IN ENGINE
COMPARTMENT

7186931
7169006
INSIDE RIGHT COVER

6595014 6815993 (2)

NA5029A

17 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

17 of 246
MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS) (CONT’D)

Pictorial Only Safety Signs NOTE: See the numbered MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS)
on Page 16 and MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS)
Safety signs are used to alert the equipment operator or (Cont’d) on Page 17 for the machine location
maintenance person to hazards that may be encountered of each corresponding numbered pictorial
in the use and maintenance of the equipment. The only decals as shown below.
location and description of the safety signs are detailed in
this section. Please become familiarized with all safety 1. Thrown Or Flying Objects (7168039)
signs installed on the excavator.
This safety sign is located on the outside of both tracks.
Vertical Configuration

HAZARD
PANEL

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

AVOIDANCE
PANEL WARNING
High pressure grease can cause serious injury. Do
not loosen grease fitting. Do not loosen bleed fitting
Horizontal Configuration more than 1 - 1/2 turns.

Read and understand the Operation & Maintenance

Manual for more information.
W-2516-0110

2. Thrown or Flying Objects (7169291)

This safety sign is located on the gas spring in the engine

compartment.

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PANEL PANEL
7169291

The format consists of the hazard panel(s) and the

avoidance panel(s):
WARNING
Hazard panels depict a potential hazard enclosed in a
safety alert triangle. High pressure gas can cause serious injury or death.
Do not open. Opening cylinder can release rod.
Avoidance panels depict actions required to avoid the W-2523-0106
hazards.

A safety sign may contain more than one hazard panel

and more than one avoidance panel.

18 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

18 of 246
 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

INTENDED USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Cab Interior Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Left Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Right Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Instrument Panel - Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Instrument Panel - Deluxe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Radio Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
STD / ISO Selector Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Raising And Lowering The Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Two-Speed Travel (Without Angle Blade Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Two-Speed Travel (With Angle Blade Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto-Shift Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Auto Idle Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

OPERATOR CANOPY (ROPS / TOPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cab Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Front Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Front Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Window Washer Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Right Side Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Heating, Ventilation, And Air Conditioning Ducting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

EMERGENCY EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Right Side Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

MOTION ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

TRAVEL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Forward And Reverse Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

19 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

19 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
STANDARD Control Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
ISO Control Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Quick Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Standard Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Deluxe Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Relieve Hydraulic Pressure With Standard Instrument Panel (Excavator And Attachment)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Relieve Hydraulic Pressure With Deluxe Instrument Panel (Excavator And Attachment) . .50
Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Relieve Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulic Pressure (Excavator And Attachment) . . . . . . . . .51
Return To Tank Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

OVERLOAD WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

BLADE CONTROL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Raising And Lowering Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Angling Blade (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL DIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Setting Engine Speed (RPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
ECO Mode (With Deluxe Instrument Panel Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

BOOM SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Lowering Boom With Load Holding Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lowering Arm With Load Holding Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Daily Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Operation & Maintenance Manual And Operator’s Handbook Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Entering The Excavator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

20 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

20 of 246
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Key Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Keyless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Deluxe Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Warming The Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cold Temperature Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

MONITORING THE DISPLAY PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Warning And Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Installing And Removing The Attachment (Hydraulic X-Change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin Grabber Quick Coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On Attachment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Inspect The Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Basic Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Lowering The Work Equipment (Engine STOPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Object Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Object Handling With The Lifting Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Lift Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Using The Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Using The Pro Clamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Boom Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Driving The Excavator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Operating On Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Operating In Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Avoiding Track Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

DEPTH CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Setup / Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

TOWING THE EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

LIFTING THE EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

TRANSPORTING THE EXCAVATOR ON A TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Loading And Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

21 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

21 of 246
INTENDED USE

This machine is classified as an Excavator as defined in

ISO 6165. This machine has tracks and commonly a
mounted bucket for the principle intended functions of
excavating, loading and backfilling loose materials such
WARNING
as earth, gravel, or crushed rock.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Additional Bobcat approved attachments allow this Do not exceed rated lift capacity. Excessive load can
machine to perform other tasks described in the cause tipping or loss of control.
W-2374-0500
attachment Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

Examples of intended use include:

Excavating
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Check area to be excavated for overhead or
underground electrical power lines. Keep a safe
distance from electrical power lines.
MINIMUM APPROACH
LINE VOLTAGE
DISTANCE

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NA1436D NA1441D 50 kV At least 3 m (10 ft)
230 kV At least 5 m (17 ft)
740 kV At least 10 m (33 ft)
Rotating the W-2757-0910
Boom Swing
Upperstructure

WARNING
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
NA1432 NA1421B
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
W-2119-0910

Loading Material Backfilling

IMPORTANT
Avoid impacting objects with the blade. Damage to
blade and undercarriage components may occur.
I-2256-0507

NA1417 NA1423

22 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

22 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES Left Console [Figure 8]
Cab Interior Light
REF.
Figure 6 DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION
NO.
1 Left Joystick (See HYDRAULIC CONTROLS
on Page 45.)
2 Horn Press the switch on the bottom
of the left joystick to sound
horn.
1 3 Boom Swing Move the switch to the left to
Switch / swing the boom to the left.
Secondary Move the switch to the right to
P-91902
Auxiliary swing the boom to the right.
Hydraulic (If (See Secondary Auxiliary
Early Models: Press the top of the switch (Item 1) Equipped) Hydraulics and Boom Swing in
[Figure 6] to turn the light ON. Press the bottom of the this manual.)
switch to turn OFF.
4 Wiper / Washer Press the switch to the left to
Figure 7 Switch turn wiper ON. Press and hold
(If Equipped) switch to the left to activate
window washer. Press the
switch to the right to turn wiper
OFF.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

5 Hydraulic X- Press and hold the switch to
Change Switch the right to fully retract
(If Equipped) hydraulic pins. Press and hold
1 the switch to the left to fully
P-91902B
extend hydraulic pins.
Pin Grabber Press switch to the left to turn
Later Models: Press either side of the lens (Item 1) Quick Coupler the pin grabber quick coupler
[Figure 7] to turn the light ON. Return the LENS to the ON / OFF Switch ON. Press the switch to the
center position to turn OFF. (If Equipped) right to turn OFF.
Left Console 6 Beacon / Strobe Press switch to the left to turn
Light ON the beacon / Strobe light.
Figure 8 (If Equipped) Press the switch to the right to
turn OFF.
3
1 7 Pin Grabber Press switch to the left to
Quick Coupler initiate the quick coupler install
INTENT Switch or remove mode. (See
(If Equipped) Installing And Removing The
Attachment (Pin Grabber Quick
Coupler) in this manual.)
2 8 OVERLOAD Press switch to the right to
WARNING enable Overload Warning
SWITCH (If feature. Press to the left to
Equipped) disable. (See Overload
6 5 4
Warning in this manual.)
9 Boom Swing Move the switch to the right to
Switch / activate the secondary
Secondary auxiliary hydraulics. Move the
Auxiliary switch to the left for boom
Hydraulic (If swing function. (See
Equipped) Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics
and Boom Swing in this
7 8 9 P113094 manual.)

23 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

23 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)
Right Console

Figure 9

5
4
5A 6 7 8
2 3
1

13
12

14
11 10

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-97985

REF DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION

1 Right Joystick (See HYDRAULIC CONTROLS in this manual.)
2 Auxiliary Hydraulic Switch Controls the fluid flow to the auxiliary quick couplers (attachment). (See Auxiliary
Hydraulics in this manual.)
3 Blade Control Lever Controls raising and lowering the blade. Pushed all the way forward puts blade in
float position. (See BLADE LEVER CONTROL in this manual).
4 Engine Speed Control Dial Controls rpm of the engine. (See ENGINE SPEED CONTROL DIAL in this
manual).
5 Two-Speed Button (Without Engages and disengages High Range Travel Speed. (See Two-Speed Travel in
Angle Blade Option) this manual).
5A Two-Speed Button (With Angle Engages and disengages High Range Travel Speed. (See Two-Speed Travel in
Blade Option) this manual). (Also see Angle Blade in this manual.)
6 Motion Alarm Cancel Switch This switch temporarily disables the motion alarm. (See MOTION ALARM
SYSTEM on Page 42.)
7 Not Used ---
8 Auxiliary Power Outlet 12 volt receptacle for accessories.
9 Key Switch Always perform the PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE. (See PRE-STARTING
PROCEDURE in this manual), before starting the engine. (See STARTING THE
ENGINE in this manual).
10 Air Conditioning Switch (If Press top of switch to turn air conditioner ON (light in switch will be ON), Press
Equipped) bottom of switch to turn OFF.
11 Fan Motor Switch (If Equipped) Turn clockwise to increase fan speed; counterclockwise to decrease.
12 Temperature Control (If Turn clockwise to increase temperature; counterclockwise to decrease.
Equipped)
13 Instrument Panel See Standard or Deluxe Instrument Panel
14 Keyless (If Equipped) (Always perform the PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE, (See PRE-STARTING
PROCEDURE in this manual), before starting the engine. (See STARTING THE
ENGINE in this manual).
NOTE: Always turn key switch and all accessories to OFF position when the engine is stopped, the battery will
discharge if the key is left ON.

24 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

24 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Instrument Panel - Standard

Figure 10

21 12 19 20

5 7
6

18
13

14 17

15 16
8 9 11
10

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1 4

2 3
P-97989

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION

1 LIGHTS Press once for work lights. (Left green LED illuminates.) Press again to
turn all lights off. (Left green LED off.)
Press and hold 5 seconds to display software version in display screen.
2 Auto Idle Feature Press once to turn Auto Idle Feature ON. (Left green LED illuminates.)
Press a second time to turn OFF. (Left and right green LEDs off.) (See
Auto Idle Feature in this manual).
3 Auxiliary Hydraulic Button Press once to enable auxiliary hydraulic function. (Left green LED
illuminates.) Continue to press and release to scroll through the
selectable auxiliary hydraulic setting (3-2-1-OFF).

Press and hold (minimum of one second) to enable the continuous flow
auxiliary hydraulic feature. (Right green LED illuminates.) Continue to
press and release to scroll through the continuous flow selectable
auxiliary hydraulic settings (3-2-1-OFF).

(See Auxiliary Hydraulics in this manual)

4 Information Cycles through (after each button press) (The following information is
displayed in the Data Display Screen, Item 6):
• Hourmeter (On startup)
• Job Clock (1 and 2)
• Engine rpm
• Battery voltage
• Maintenance clock (Press and hold 7 seconds when displayed to
reset the maintenance clock.)
• Service codes*
5 Engine Temperature Gauge Shows the engine coolant temperature.

25 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

25 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Instrument Panel - Standard (Cont’d)

REF. NO. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION

6 Data Display Screen The data display screen shows the Hourmeter at start up and then
changes to engine rpm during normal operation of the excavator. When
preheat is activated, the display screen will show the remaining preheat
time. Can also be used to display Job Clock, Engine rpm, and
Selectable Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow. (See Job Clock in this manual).
7 Fuel Gauge Shows the amount of fuel in the tank.
8 Seat Belt Fasten Seat Belt Reminder - Light stays on for 45 seconds to remind
operator to fasten seat belt.
9 Not used for this model.
10 Not used for this model.
11 Left Console Lockout Icon ON when left console is raised. Icon OFF when left console is
lowered.
12 General Warning ** Malfunction with one or more machine functions. (See Service Codes
in this manual.)
13 High Range Engaged *** Icon is illuminated when two-speed travel is enabled.
14 Engine Coolant Temperature ** Engine coolant temperature high or sensor error.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

15 Engine Malfunction ** Engine malfunction or failure.
16 Hydraulic System Malfunction ** Hydraulic system malfunction or failure.
17 Fuel Fuel level low or sensor error. (Icon is ON when fuel level is low, Icon
flashes when fuel sensor fault is activated.)
18 Not used for this model.
19 Not used for this model.
20 Not used for this model.
21 Not used for this model.

* See SYSTEM SETUP AND ANALYSIS for Service Code Description. (See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page
184.)

** Icons will be ON or flashing when diagnostic system indicates a problem. (See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on
Page 184.)

*** Icons will be flashing when diagnostic system indicates a problem. (See DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page
184.)

26 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

26 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Instrument Panel - Standard (Cont’d)

Indicator Icons

The display screen can display the following information:

• Operating hours
• Job Clock (1 and 2)
• Engine rpm
• Battery voltage
• Maintenance clock countdown
• Service codes

Figure 11

1
2

10

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

4

5 6 7 8 9
P-97993

The display screen is shown in [Figure 11]. The data

display will show operating hours upon startup.

1. Data Display

2. Hourmeter

3. Metric / English (Not Used For This Model)

4. Clock (Not Used For This Model)

5. Selectable Auxiliary Flow (3 - 2 - 1)

6. Engine Preheat

7. Engine RPM

8. Battery / Charging Voltage

9. Service

10. Job Clock (1 and 2)

27 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

27 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Instrument Panel - Deluxe

Figure 12 Figure 13

P113014

Turn the start key to the ON position.

4
P-97991
When this screen is on the display you can enter the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

password and start the engine [Figure 13].
This machine may be equipped with a Deluxe Instrument
NOTE: Your excavator (with Deluxe Instrument
Panel [Figure 12].
Panel) will have an Owner Password. Your
dealer will provide you with this password.
1. Keypad (1 through 0): The keypad has two Change the password to one that you will
functions: easily remember to prevent unauthorized use
of your excavator. (See Changing The Owner
- To enter a number code (password) to allow starting Password on Page 195.) Keep your password
the engine. in a safe location for future needs.

- To enter a number as directed for further use of the Enter The Password:
display screen.
Use the numbers on the keypad to enter the password,
then press the [ENTER] button. A symbol will appear on
2. Display Screen: The display screen is where all
the display screen for each number entered. The left
system setup, monitoring, and error conditions are
scroll button can be used to backspace if an incorrect
displayed.
number is entered.
3. Scroll Buttons: Used to scroll through display screen
If the correct password is not entered, [INVALID
choices.
PASSWORD] will appear on the display screen and the
password will have to be reentered.
4. ENTER Button: Used to make selections on the
display screen.
See CONTROL PANEL SETUP for further description of
screens to set up the system for your use. (See
CONTROL PANEL SETUP on Page 188.)

Lights

Press key pad [1] [Figure 13] once for FRONT work
lights. Press a second time to turn all lights off.

Change Language:

The language can be changed at any time. (See

CONTROL PANEL SETUP on Page 188.)

28 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

28 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Radio Option

Figure 14

P-97994

This excavator may be equipped with a radio (Item 1) and

the headphone jack (Item 2) [Figure 14].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

9
10

11
12
8

13
14 15

17

16 NA3090

NOTE: See DISPLAY (Item 3) in the following table for clock setting instructions.

29 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

29 of 246
INSTRUMENT AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Radio (Cont’d)

REF.
DESCRIPTION FUNCTION / OPERATION
NO.
1 POWER Press to turn ON; press again to turn OFF.
2 MUTE Press to mute audio output; [MUTE] will appear in display screen; press again to turn OFF.
3 DISPLAY Press to toggle between function mode (showing tuner frequency, auxiliary input, weather
band information, or timer) and clock mode.
Press and hold to enter clock setting mode; use FREQUENCY DOWN (TUN -) button to
adjust hours and FREQUENCY UP (TUN +) button to adjust minutes; normal operation
will resume automatically.
4 BAND Press to select tuner mode. Press to cycle through 2 AM (MW) bands and 3 FM bands.
5 AUXILIARY Press to select Auxiliary Input mode. Portable audio device (MP3 player) must be attached
to auxiliary input jack.
6 WEATHER BAND Press to select weather band; use FREQUENCY UP (TUN +) and FREQUENCY DOWN
(TUN -) buttons to adjust to the clearest station.
The weather alert feature, if activated, will automatically switch from the current function to
the weather band if a weather warning is received. See AUDIO / MENU ADJUSTMENT in
this table.
7 TIMER Press to access timer mode. Press to start the timer function; press again to stop timer;

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

press again to resume timer or press and hold to reset timer and exit from timer mode.
8 DISPLAY SCREEN Displays the time, frequency, and activated functions.
9 VOLUME UP Adjusts volume up; current volume (0 - 40) will appear briefly in display screen.
10 AUDIO / MENU AUDIO ADJUSTMENT: Press to cycle through bass, treble, and balance settings; use
ADJUSTMENT VOLUME UP (VOL +) and VOLUME DOWN (VOL -) buttons to adjust when desired option
is displayed; normal operation will resume automatically.

MENU ADJUSTMENT: Press and hold for 3 seconds to enter menu adjustment settings;
press to cycle through the following settings; use VOLUME UP (VOL +) and VOLUME
DOWN (VOL -) buttons to adjust when desired option is displayed; normal operation will
resume automatically.
• Beep Confirm (On or Off) - Determines if beep will sound with each button press.
• Operation Region (USA or Europe) - Selects the appropriate region.
• Clock Display (12 or 24) - Selects a 12-hour or 24-hour clock display.
• Display Brightness (Low, Medium, or High) - Determines brightness level of display
screen.
• Backlight Color (Amber or Green) - Determines backlight color of display screen.
• Power On Volume (0 - 40) - Selects default volume setting when radio is turned on.
• WB Alert (On or Off) - Determines if weather band alert feature is activated.
11 FREQUENCY DOWN Press to manually tune the radio frequency down.
12 FREQUENCY UP Press to manually tune the radio frequency up.
13 VOLUME DOWN Adjusts volume down; current volume (0 - 40) will appear briefly in display screen.
14 SEEK FREQUENCY Press to automatically tune frequency down to next strong station.
DOWN
15 SEEK FREQUENCY Press to automatically tune frequency up to next strong station.
UP
16 PRESET STATIONS Used to store and recall stations for each AM and FM band. Press and hold to store
current station; press button to recall station.
17 AUXILIARY INPUT Connect line output of portable audio device (MP3 player) to 3,5 mm (1/8 in) jack and
JACK press AUXILIARY button.

30 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

30 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

STD / ISO Selector Valve Raising And Lowering The Console

The STD / ISO selector valve is located below the Raise the console before exiting the cab.
operator’s seat, inside the tool box.
Figure 18
Figure 16

P-97995
P113085

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Pull up on the release handle [Figure 18]. The lift spring
From below the operator’s seat, open the tool box cover will assist in raising the console.
(Item 1) [Figure 16].
Lower the console before operating the excavator.
Figure 17
Push down on the lever [Figure 18] until the latch is
engaged.

NOTE: When the console is raised, the hydraulic and

traction system functions are locked and will
2 not operate.

3 If the engine stops, the boom / bucket

(attachments) can be lowered to the ground
using hydraulic pressure in the accumulator.

1 The control console must be in the locked

down position, and the key switch in the ON
position.
P113086

The joystick hydraulic function can be switched from

Standard control pattern to ISO control pattern.

Rotate the lever (Item 1) counterclockwise (Item 2) to

select STANDARD Control Pattern. Rotate the lever
clockwise (Item 3) to select ISO Control Pattern
[Figure 17].

31 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

31 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Two-Speed Travel (Without Angle Blade Option) Two-Speed Travel (With Angle Blade Option)

Figure 19 Figure 21

P-97996 P-97997

Press the button (Item 1) [Figure 19] to engage the high Press the button (Item 1) [Figure 21] to engage the high
range. Press a second time to disengage. range. Press a second time to disengage.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: When engaging high range, two audible Figure 22
beeps will be heard. When engaging low
range, one audible beep will be heard.

Figure 20 1

P-97988A

When high range is engaged, the two-speed travel icon

P-97988A
(Item 1) [Figure 22] will illuminate.

Press the button (Item 1) [Figure 21] again to disengage.

When high range is engaged, the two-speed travel icon
(Item 1) [Figure 20] will illuminate. Auto-Shift Drive System

Press the button (Item 1) [Figure 19] again to disengage. When in high range, the travel motors will automatically
shift to low range when more torque is required and
return to high range when hydraulic pressure decreases.

NOTE: Always set the travel speed to low range when

loading or unloading the excavator onto a
transport vehicle.

32 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

32 of 246
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES (CONT’D)

Auto Idle Feature

The auto idle feature (when engaged) will reduce the engine speed to low idle when the control levers (joystick, blade,
travel, etc.) are in NEUTRAL and not used for approximately four seconds. The engine rpm will return to the set position
as soon as any control lever is activated.

Standard Panel Deluxe Panel

Figure 23 Figure 24

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1
1 P-97988 P97990A

The automatic idle switch (Item 1) [Figure 23] is used to Press [ENTER] (Item 1) once to engage automatic idle.
engage or disengage the automatic idle feature. Press [ENTER] (Item 1) [Figure 24] again and auto idle
will be OFF.
Press the switch (Item 1) once to engage automatic idle
and the LED (Item 2) will illuminate. Press the switch NOTE: Always disengage the auto idle feature when
(Item 1) a second time to disengage automatic idle, the loading or unloading the excavator onto a
LED (Item 2) [Figure 23] will be OFF. transport vehicle.

NOTE: Always disengage the auto idle feature when NOTE: When equipped with the deluxe instrument
loading or unloading the excavator onto a panel, the time delay for auto idle to activate
transport vehicle. can be adjusted. (See Auto Idle Time Delay on
Page 190.)

33 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

33 of 246
OPERATOR CANOPY (ROPS / TOPS) OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS)

Description Description

The Bobcat excavator has an operator canopy (ROPS / The Bobcat excavator has an optional operator cab
TOPS) as standard equipment to protect the operator if (ROPS / TOPS) as standard equipment to protect the
the excavator is tipped over. The seat belt must be worn operator if the excavator is tipped over. The seat belt
for ROPS / TOPS protection. must be worn for ROPS / TOPS protection.

Check the ROPS / TOPS canopy, mounting, and Check the ROPS / TOPS cab, mounting, and hardware
hardware for damage. Never modify the ROPS / TOPS for damage. Never modify the ROPS / TOPS cab.
canopy. Replace the canopy and hardware if damaged. Replace the cab and hardware if damaged. See your
See your Bobcat dealer for parts. Bobcat dealer for parts.

ROPS / TOPS - Roll-Over Protective Structure per ISO ROPS / TOPS - Roll-Over Protective Structure per ISO
12117-2, and Tip-Over Protective Structure per ISO 12117-2, and Tip-Over Protective Structure per ISO
12117. 12117.

WARNING WARNING
Never modify operator cab by welding, grinding, Never modify operator cab by welding, grinding,
drilling holes or adding attachments unless drilling holes or adding attachments unless

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

instructed to do so by Bobcat Company. Changes to instructed to do so by Bobcat Company. Changes to
the cab can cause loss of operator protection from the cab can cause loss of operator protection from
rollover and falling objects, and result in injury or rollover and falling objects, and result in injury or
death. death.
W-2069-0200 W-2069-0200

34 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

34 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Cab Door

Figure 25 Figure 27

P-97245 P-91910

The cab door can be locked (Item 1) [Figure 25] with the When the door is in the open position, push down on the
same key as the starter switch. latch (Item 1) [Figure 27] and close the door.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 26 Figure 28

1 2

P-97246 P-91911

Push the door all the way open until the latch post (Item From inside the cab, open the door using handle (Item 1)
1) engages in the latch (Item 2) [Figure 26] to hold the [Figure 28].
door in the open position.

35 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

35 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Front Window

Opening The Front Window

Figure 29 Figure 31

P-97681 P-97683

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Press the window latch button (Item 1) [Figure 29] (both When the window is fully raised, the latch (Item 1)
sides). [Figure 31] (both sides) will close on the bracket in the
latched position.
Figure 30
Pull down and forward slightly on the window to make
sure it is fully latched.

Closing The Front Window

Use both window grab handles to support the window

while pressing the window latch button (Item 2)
[Figure 31] (both sides).

Use both window grab handles (Item 1) [Figure 30] to

pull the window down fully.

1 Press the top of the window in until the latch locks into
the latched position (both sides) [Figure 29].

P113087
Pull inward and upward slightly on the window to make
sure it is fully latched in the closed position.
Use both window grab handles (Item 1) [Figure 30] to
pull the top of the window in.

Continue moving the window in and up over the

operator’s head until the window is fully raised.

36 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

36 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Front Wiper Window Washer Reservoir

Figure 32 Figure 33

P-91998 P-97102

The front window is equipped with a wiper (Item 1) The window washer reservoir (Item 1) [Figure 33] is
[Figure 32] and washer. located under the right side cover.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

37 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

37 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Right Side Windows

Opening The Right Rear Window Closing The Right Rear Window

Figure 34 Raise the latch (Item 1) [Figure 37].

Push the latch (Item 1) [Figure 36] back to close the

window. Rotate the latch (Item 1) [Figure 34] down.

P-91997

Raise the latch (Item 1) [Figure 34] located at the rear of

the front window.

Figure 35

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1

P-91917

Pull out on the latch (Item 1) [Figure 35].

Figure 36

P-91918

Pull the latch (Item 1) [Figure 36] forward to open the

window. When the window is in the open position, push
down on the latch (Item 1) [Figure 34].

38 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

38 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Right Side Windows (Cont’d)

Opening The Right Front Window

Figure 37 When the window is in the open position, push down on

the latch (Item 1) [Figure 37].

Closing The Right Front Window

Raise the latch (Item 1) [Figure 37].

1 Push the handle (Item 1) [Figure 39] forward to close the

window. Rotate the latch (Item 1) [Figure 37] down.

P-91997

Raise the latch (Item 1) [Figure 37] located at the rear of

the front window.

Figure 38

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1

P-91915

Pull back on the latch (Item 1) [Figure 38].

Figure 39

P-91916

Pull the latch (Item 1) [Figure 39] back to open the

window.

39 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

39 of 246
OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) (CONT’D)

Heating, Ventilation, And Air Conditioning Ducting

Figure 40

1
P-97985

The HVAC louvers (Item 1) [Figure 40] can be positioned

as needed to direct the air flow to various areas in the
cab.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

40 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

40 of 246
EMERGENCY EXIT

The door, the right side rear window and the front window provide exits.

Right Side Rear Window

Figure 41

P-92955

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Exit through the window [Figure 41].

Front Window

Figure 42

P-91913

Open the front window and exit [Figure 42].

NOTE: If the excavator has a Special Applications Kit

installed, the front window is NOT an
emergency exit.

41 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

41 of 246
MOTION ALARM SYSTEM

Operation

Figure 43

WARNING
This machine is equipped with a motion alarm.
ALARM MUST SOUND!
when operating forward or backward.

Failure to maintain a clear view in the direction of

travel could result in serious injury or death.

The operator is responsible for the safe operation of

1 this machine.
W-2786-0309

P-97222 The motion alarm will sound when the operator moves
the travel control levers (Item 1) [Figure 45] in either the
forward or reverse direction.
This excavator may be equipped with a motion alarm

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

system. The motion alarm (Item 1) [Figure 43] is located If alarm does not sound or for adjustment instructions,
inside the rear of the excavator. see inspection and maintenance instructions for the
motion alarm system in the preventive maintenance
Figure 44 section of this manual. (See MOTION ALARM SYSTEM
on Page 140.)

P-97985

The motion alarm can be temporarily disabled by

pressing the motion alarm switch (Item 1) [Figure 44]
while the machine is moving. As soon as the travel levers
are returned to the NEUTRAL position, the motion alarm
will be enabled.

42 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

42 of 246
TRAVEL CONTROLS

Forward And Reverse Travel Turning

NOTE: The following procedures describe forward, Right Turn

reverse, left and right as seated in the
operator’s seat. Figure 46
Right Turn
Figure 45 (Forward)
1 1 FORWARD

NEUTRAL

REVERSE

2 NA1457A
2

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-97998 Push the left steering lever forward to turn right
[Figure 46] while traveling forward.
Put the blade so that it is at the front of the machine (as
Figure 47
you sit in the operator’s seat). Slowly move both steering
levers* (Item 1) [Figure 45] forward for forward travel; Right Turn
backward for reverse travel. (Reverse)

* Travel can also be controlled with foot pedals (Item 2)

[Figure 45]. Pivot the heel of the pedals forward for
additional space on the floor.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
• Check the blade location before traveling. When
the blade is to the rear, operate the steering NA1458A
levers / foot pedals in the opposite direction to
when the blade is in the front.
• Move the steering levers / foot pedals slowly. Pull the left steering lever backward to turn right while
Abrupt lever motion will cause the machine to traveling backward [Figure 47].
jerk.
W-2235-0396

43 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

43 of 246
TRAVEL CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Turning (Cont’d)

Counter-Rotation Right Turn

Figure 48 Figure 50
Counter-Rotation Left Turn
(Right Turn) (Reverse)

NA1459A NA1461A

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Push the left steering lever forward and pull the right Pull the right steering lever backward to turn left while
steering lever backward [Figure 48]. traveling backward [Figure 50].

Left Turn Counter-Rotation Left Turn

Figure 49 Figure 51
Left Turn Counter-Rotation
(Forward) (Left Turn)

NA1460A NA1462A

Push the right steering lever forward to turn left while Push the right steering lever forward and pull the left
traveling forward [Figure 49]. steering lever backward [Figure 51].

44 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

44 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS Right Control Lever (Joystick)

Description Figure 53

The work equipment (boom, arm, bucket, and

upperstructure slew) is operated by using the left and
right control levers (joysticks). These joysticks can be
used in either a STANDARD Control Pattern [Figure 52]
and [Figure 53] or in the ISO Control Pattern [Figure 54]
and [Figure 55].

STANDARD Control Pattern

Left Control Lever (Joystick)

Figure 52

STD CONTROL
PATTERN

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

STD CONTROL
PATTERN P113003A

The right lever (joystick) is used to operate the arm and

bucket [Figure 53].

1. Arm out.
2. Arm out and bucket dump.
3. Bucket dump.
4. Arm in and bucket dump.
5. Arm in.
6. Arm in and bucket curl.
P113002A
7. Bucket curl.
8. Arm out and bucket curl.
The left lever (joystick) is used to operate the boom and
slew the upperstructure [Figure 52].

1. Boom lower. WARNING

2. Boom lower and slew right.
3. Slew right. AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
4. Boom raise and slew right. Before leaving the machine:
5. Boom raise. • Lower the work equipment to the ground.
6. Boom raise and slew left. • Lower the blade to the ground.
7. Slew left. • Stop the engine and remove the key.
8. Boom lower and slew left. • Raise the control console.
W-2780-0109

45 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

45 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Right Control Lever (Joystick)

ISO Control Pattern Figure 55

Left Control Lever (Joystick)

Figure 54

ISO CONTROL
PATTERN

ISO CONTROL
PATTERN

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113003B

P113002B The right lever (joystick) is used to operate the boom and
bucket [Figure 55].

The left lever (joystick) is used to operate the arm and 1. Boom lower.
slew the upperstructure [Figure 54]. 2. Boom lower and bucket dump.
3. Bucket dump.
1. Arm out. 4. Boom raise and bucket dump.
2. Arm out and slew right. 5. Boom raise.
3. Slew right. 6. Boom raise and bucket curl.
4. Arm in and slew right.
7. Bucket curl.
5. Arm in.
8. Boom lower and bucket curl.
6. Arm in and slew left.
7. Slew left.
8. Arm out and slew left.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Before leaving the machine:
• Lower the work equipment to the ground.
• Lower the blade to the ground.
• Stop the engine and remove the key.
• Raise the control console.
W-2780-0109

46 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

46 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Quick Couplers

To Connect:

WARNING Remove any dirt or debris from the surface of both the
male and female couplers, and from the outside diameter
of the male coupler. Visually check the couplers for
AVOID BURNS corroding, cracking, damage, or excessive wear, if any of
Hydraulic fluid, tubes, fittings and quick couplers these conditions exist, the coupler(s) (Item 1) [Figure 56]
can get hot when running machine and attachments. must be replaced.
Be careful when connecting and disconnecting quick
couplers. Install the male coupler into the female coupler. Full
W-2220-0396
connection is made when the ball release sleeve slides
forward on the female coupler.

To Disconnect:

WARNING Figure 57

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or 2
1

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

Figure 56

N-15540

1
Hold the male coupler (Item 1). Retract the sleeve (Item
2) [Figure 57] on the female coupler until the couplers
disconnect.

1
P-92999

Excavators and attachments are supplied with flush

faced couplers (Item 1) [Figure 56].

HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Auxiliary Hydraulics - Standard Instrument Panel

47 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

47 of 246
The primary auxiliary hydraulics has Selectable Auxiliary Examples For Setting Selectable Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow
Hydraulic Flow or Continuous Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow. And The Attachment Used:
This allows the operator to select a hydraulic flow that
matches the attachment hydraulic requirements. The AUX FLOW
auxiliary hydraulics can be set to Aux3, Aux2, Aux1 or FLOW ATTACHMENTS
SETTING
OFF. Aux3 allows maximum hydraulic flow, Aux2 allows
medium hydraulic flow and Aux1 allows low hydraulic Aux3 Maximum Breaker, Vibratory Plate
flow. Compactor, Auger
Figure 58 Aux2 Medium Clamp, Grapple
Aux1 Low Power Tilt, Hydra Tilt
2
NOTE: Use only approved attachments for your
model excavator. Attachments are approved
for each model of excavator based on various
factors. Using unapproved attachments could
cause damage to the attachment or to the
excavator.
1
Figure 59

1
4
3
P97998B

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: If the auxiliary hydraulics are enabled when
the engine is turned OFF, they will stay
enabled when the engine is restarted. If
Continuous Flow was enabled at engine OFF, 2
it will reset to selectable flow mode.

Selectable Auxiliary Hydraulics Flow - Press the Auxiliary

Hydraulics button (Item 1) (an audible beep will sound
each time the auxiliary button is pressed). The last P113001
selected auxiliary hydraulic flow (Aux3, Aux2 or Aux1) will
appear in the data display (Item 2). The LED (Item 3)
[Figure 58] will be illuminated. Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 59] on the right control
lever to the right to supply hydraulic flow to the female
To change the auxiliary flow, press the Auxiliary coupler. Move the switch to the left to supply hydraulic
Hydraulics button (Item 1) to toggle through the settings, flow to the male coupler. If you move the switch halfway,
each time the button is pressed, the next setting will the auxiliary functions move at approximately one-half
appear in the data display (Item 2) [Figure 58]. Once the speed.
desired setting is selected, it will stay at that setting until
a different auxiliary flow is selected by the operator. Press the button (Item 2) [Figure 59] on the front of the
(Example: Even if the engine was STOPPED, if Aux2 has handle to provide continuous flow to the female coupler.
been selected, after key OFF and engine restart, the
Aux2 setting will still be the active hydraulic flow when the NOTE: Pressing the switch (Item 1) to the left while
machine is started.) pressing the button (Item 2) [Figure 59] on the
front of the handle will provide continuous
Continuous Flow Auxiliary Hydraulics - Press and hold
flow to the male coupler.
the Auxiliary Hydraulics button (Item 1) for more than one
second. The LED (Item 4) will illuminate. Press the
Press the button (Item 2) [Figure 59] a second time to
Auxiliary Hydraulics button (Item 1) [Figure 58] again to
stop auxiliary flow to the quick couplers.
scroll through the various continuous flow auxiliary
hydraulic settings (3, 2, 1).
NOTE: Reverse flow can cause damage to some
attachments. Use reverse flow with your
attachment only if approved. See your
attachment Operation & Maintenance Manual
for detailed information.

48 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

48 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Examples For Setting Selectable Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow
And The Attachment Used:
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Deluxe Instrument Panel
AUX FLOW
The primary auxiliary hydraulics has Selectable Auxiliary FLOW ATTACHMENTS
SETTING
Hydraulic Flow or Continuous Auxiliary Hydraulic Flow.
This allows the operator to select a hydraulic flow that Aux3 Maximum Breaker, Vibratory Plate
matches the attachment hydraulic requirements. The Compactor, Auger
auxiliary hydraulics can be set to Aux3, Aux2, Aux1 or
Aux2 Medium Clamp, Grapple
OFF. Aux3 allows maximum hydraulic flow, Aux2 allows
medium hydraulic flow and Aux1 allows low hydraulic Aux1 Low Power Tilt, Hydra Tilt
flow.
NOTE: Use only approved attachments for your
Figure 60
model excavator. Attachments are approved
for each model of excavator based on various
factors. Using unapproved attachments could
6
cause damage to the attachment or to the
excavator.
Figure 61

P113015B

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: If the auxiliary hydraulics are enabled when
the engine is turned OFF, they will stay
enabled when the engine is restarted. If
Continuous Flow was enabled at engine OFF, 2
it will reset to selectable flow mode.

Selectable Flow Auxiliary Hydraulics - Press key pad [6]

[Figure 60] to scroll through the various front auxiliary
hydraulic settings (3, 2, 1). P113001

Continuous Flow Auxiliary Hydraulics - Press and hold

the key pad [6] [Figure 60] for more than one second. Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 61] on the right control
The continuous flow icons below will illuminate. Press the lever to the right to supply hydraulic flow to the female
key pad [6] to scroll through the various continuous flow coupler. Move the switch to the left to supply hydraulic
auxiliary hydraulic settings (3, 2, 1). flow to the male coupler. If you move the switch halfway,
the auxiliary functions move at approximately one-half
ICON DESCRIPTION speed.

Engine OFF - Auxiliary Hydraulics Pressure Press the button (Item 2) [Figure 61] on the front of the
Relieve handle to provide continuous flow to the female coupler.
Engine Running - Auxiliary Hydraulics OFF
NOTE: Pressing the switch (Item 1) to the left while
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Maximum Flow - pressing the button (Item 2) [Figure 61] on the
Continuous Flow Disabled front of the handle will provide continuous
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Medium Flow - flow to the male coupler.
Continuous Flow Disabled
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Low Flow - Continuous Press the button (Item 2) [Figure 61] a second time to
Flow Disabled stop auxiliary flow to the quick couplers.
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Maximum Flow -
Continuous Flow Enabled NOTE: Reverse flow can cause damage to some
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Medium Flow - attachments. Use reverse flow with your
attachment only if approved. See your
Continuous Flow Enabled
attachment Operation & Maintenance Manual
Auxiliary Hydraulics - Low Flow - Continuous for detailed information.
Flow Enabled

49 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

49 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D) Relieve Hydraulic Pressure With Deluxe Instrument
Panel (Excavator And Attachment)
Relieve Hydraulic Pressure With Standard
Excavator:
Instrument Panel (Excavator And Attachment)
Put the attachment flat on the ground.
Excavator: NOTE: Excavator engine must have recently been
started to relieve hydraulic pressure.
Put the attachment flat on the ground.
Figure 63
Stop the engine and turn the key switch to ON.

NOTE: The left console must be fully lowered for

relieving hydraulic pressure.

NOTE: Excavator engine must have recently been

started to relieve hydraulic pressure.
Figure 62
1 1

P-97990

Stop the engine and turn the start switch to ON. Press

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

either scroll button (Item 1) [Figure 63] (Deluxe Panel)
until the above screen is visible.
Press button [6] [Figure 63] and the [AUX PRESSURE
1 RELEASE] screen [Figure 64] will be visible.

Figure 64

P97998B

If the auxiliary hydraulics are disabled, press AUX HYD

button (Item 1) [Figure 62] and then move the switch
(Item 1) [Figure 61] to the right and left several times. 1

If the auxiliary hydraulics are enabled, then move the

switch (Item 1) [Figure 61] to the right and left several P-97999
times.

Attachments: Press the [ENTER] button (Item 1) [Figure 64] to relieve

auxiliary pressure in the excavator. An hour glass symbol
• Follow procedure above to relieve hydraulic pressure will appear and when pressure is relieve, the screen will
in excavator. show Auxiliary Hydraulic Pressure Release.

• Connect male coupler from attachment to female Attachments:

coupler of excavator then repeat procedure above. • Follow procedure above to relieve hydraulic pressure
This will relieve pressure in the attachment. in excavator.
• Connect male coupler from attachment to female
• Connect the female coupler from the attachment. coupler of excavator then repeat procedure above.
This will relieve pressure in the attachment.
Hydraulic pressure in the auxiliary hydraulic system can • Connect the female coupler from the attachment.
make it difficult to engage quick couplers to an Hydraulic pressure in the auxiliary hydraulic system can
attachment. make it difficult to engage quick couplers to an
attachment.

50 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

50 of 246
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics Relieve Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulic Pressure

(Excavator And Attachment)
When equipped with secondary auxiliary hydraulics, the
second set of hydraulic couplers will be mounted on the Excavator:
right side of the arm.
Put the attachment flat on the ground.
Figure 65
Stop the engine and turn the key to ON.

NOTE: The left console must be fully lowered for

relieving hydraulic pressure.

NOTE: Excavator engine must have recently been

started to relieve hydraulic pressure.
1
Press AUX HYD button (Item 1) [Figure 65] and then
move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 66] to the right and left
several times.

Attachments:

P-91925A • Follow procedure above to relieve pressure in

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

excavator.

Press AUX HYD button (Item 1) [Figure 65] (if equipped) • Connect male coupler from attachment to female
to the right, secondary auxiliary hydraulic position. coupler of excavator then repeat procedure above.
This will relieve pressure in the attachment.
Figure 66
• Connect the female coupler from the attachment.

1 Hydraulic pressure in the auxiliary hydraulic system can

make it difficult to engage quick couplers to an
attachment.

P113000

Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 66] on the left control

lever to the left to supply hydraulic flow to the female
coupler. Move the switch to the right to supply hydraulic
flow to the male coupler. If you move the switch halfway,
the auxiliary functions move at approximately one-half
speed.

HYDRAULIC CONTROLS (CONT’D)

Return To Tank Valve

The return to tank valve is located under the right side

cover at the front of the control valve (if equipped).

51 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

51 of 246
Figure 67 OVERLOAD WARNING

Description

The overload warning feature, when engaged, will alert

the operator with a warning buzzer and the general
warning icon on the instrument panel when the work
1 group is overloaded.

If overload occurs, immediately bring the arm toward the

machine, lower the boom and reduce the load before
continuing operation.

Operation

P113095 Figure 68

Rotate the lever (Item 1) [Figure 67] clockwise to direct

auxiliary return hydraulic fluid to the reservoir.

Rotate the lever (Item 1) [Figure 67] counterclockwise for

two way hydraulic auxiliary flow operation.
1

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113186

Figure 69

Press the switch (Item 1) [Figure 68] to the right to

enable the Overload Warning Feature.

A buzzer will sound and the general warning icon (Item 1)

[Figure 69] will illuminate when the boom is overloaded.

To disengage the overload warning feature, press the

switch (Item 1) [Figure 68] to the left. The icon (Item 1)
[Figure 69] will turn off when the overload warning
feature is disabled.

52 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

52 of 246
BLADE CONTROL LEVER

Raising And Lowering Blade Angling Blade (If Equipped)

Figure 70 Figure 71

3 2 1
1

P113004 P113005

NOTE: The blade lever shown in [Figure 70] is for Figure 72

machines without angle blade. For machines
LEFT

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

with angle blade, the blade lever is shown in
[Figure 71].

Pull the lever backward to raise the blade (Item 1)

[Figure 70].

Push the lever forward to lower the blade (Item 2)

[Figure 70].

Push the lever (Item 3) [Figure 70] forward until the lever
is in the locked position to put the blade in the float RIGHT
position.

Pull the lever backward to unlock from the float position. MS-2379S

NOTE: Keep blade lowered for increased digging

performance. Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 71] to the left to angle
the blade to the left [Figure 72].

Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 71] to the right to angle

the blade to the right [Figure 72].

NOTE: Always have the blade straight for excavating

or for lifting the excavator.

53 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

53 of 246
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL DIAL

Setting Engine Speed (RPM) ECO Mode (With Deluxe Instrument Panel Only)

Figure 73 If equipped with the Deluxe Instrument Panel, ECO mode

is available.

To enable ECO mode: (See ECO MODE on Page 191.)

2 3

P113006

The engine speed control dial (Item 1) [Figure 73]

controls engine rpm.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Rotate the engine speed control dial counterclockwise
(Item 2) to reduce engine rpm. Rotate the engine speed
control dial clockwise (Item 3) [Figure 73] to increase
engine rpm.

54 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

54 of 246
BOOM SWING

Operation

Figure 74 Figure 75

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113008

The switch (Item 1) [Figure 74] on the left control lever

(joystick) controls boom swing. Move the switch to the left NA-1432
to swing the boom to the left. Move the switch to the right
to swing the boom to the right.
NOTE: The purpose of the boom swing is to offset the
Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics: boom with respect to the upperstructure for
digging close to a structure [Figure 75].
If the machine is equipped with secondary auxiliary
hydraulic couplers, the switch (Item 2) [Figure 74] is
used to select either the boom swing function or the
secondary auxiliary hydraulic function.

Move the switch (Item 2) [Figure 74] to the left to select

boom swing function, move the switch to the right to
select secondary auxiliary hydraulic function.

55 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

55 of 246
BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE

Description Lowering Boom With Load Holding Valve

The boom load holding valve (if equipped) will hold the Figure 76
boom in it’s current position in the event of hydraulic
pressure loss.
2

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
1
Do Not work or stand under raised work equipment
or attachment.
W-2793-0409
P-92993

If the excavator is equipped with a boom load holding

valve (Item 1) [Figure 76], it will be attached to the boom
cylinder at the base end.

NOTE: DO NOT remove or adjust the two port relief

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

valves (Item 2) [Figure 76]. If the port relief
valves have been tampered with, see your
Bobcat dealer for service.

Figure 77

P-92994

Remove the plastic protective cap (Item 1) [Figure 77]

from the valve.

WARNING
AVOID BURNS
Hydraulic fluid, tubes, fittings and quick couplers
can get hot when running machine and attachments.
Be careful when connecting and disconnecting quick
couplers.
W-2220-0396

56 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

56 of 246
BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE (CONT’D)

Lowering Boom With Load Holding Valve (Cont’d)

Figure 78 Loss of hydraulic pressure:

Use the same procedure as: With rod end hose failure
and NO accumulator pressure.
1

P-92995

Lowering procedures:

With base end hose failure:

Loosen the jam nut (Item 1). Install a hex wrench into the
valve screw (Item 2) [Figure 78] and slowly rotate the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

screw clockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and allow the boom to
lower to the ground.

After the boom is fully lowered, rotate the screw

counterclockwise (Item 2) 1/8 to 1/4 turn and tighten the
lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 78].

With rod end hose failure - with accumulator

pressure:

Place a container under the valve and hose end to

contain hydraulic fluid. Enter the excavator and turn the
key to the ON position or press the ENTER CODE Button
(Keyless Panel), but do not start the engine. Slowly move
the joystick boom lower function and allow the boom to
lower to the ground.

With rod end hose failure and NO accumulator

pressure:

Remove the boom base end hose from the boom load
holding valve. Place a container under the valve and
base end hose to contain hydraulic fluid.

Loosen the jam nut (Item 1). Install a hex wrench into the
valve screw (Item 2) [Figure 78] and slowly rotate the
screw clockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and allow the boom to
lower to the ground.

After the boom is fully lowered, rotate the screw (Item 2)

counterclockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and tighten the lock nut
(Item 1) [Figure 78]. Reinstall the base end hose.

57 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

57 of 246
ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE

Description

The arm load holding valve (if equipped) will hold the arm Figure 80
in it’s current position in the event of hydraulic pressure
loss.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH 1
Do Not work or stand under raised work equipment
or attachment.
W-2793-0409

Lowering Arm With Load Holding Valve

P-92948
Figure 79

NOTE: DO NOT remove or adjust the two port relief

valves (Item 1) [Figure 80]. If the port relief

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

valves have been tampered with, see your
1
Bobcat dealer for service.

Figure 81

P-92998

If the excavator is equipped with arm load holding valve

1
(Item 1) [Figure 79], it will be attached to the arm
cylinder base end as shown.

P-92997

Remove the plastic protective cap (Item 1) [Figure 81]

from the valve.

WARNING
AVOID BURNS
Hydraulic fluid, tubes, fittings and quick couplers
can get hot when running machine and attachments.
Be careful when connecting and disconnecting quick
couplers.
W-2220-0396

58 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

58 of 246
ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE (CONT’D)

Lowering Arm With Load Holding Valve (Cont’d)

Figure 82 Loss of hydraulic pressure:

Use the same procedure as: With rod end hose failure -
with NO accumulator pressure above.
2

P-92996

Lowering procedures:

With base end hose failure:

Loosen the jam nut (Item 1). Install a hex wrench into the
valve screw (Item 2) [Figure 82] and slowly rotate the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

screw clockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and allow the arm to
lower.

After the arm is lowered, rotate the screw

counterclockwise (Item 2) the same 1/8 to 1/4 turn and
tighten the lock nut (Item 1) [Figure 82].

With rod end hose failure - with accumulator

pressure:

Place a container under the valve and hose end to

contain hydraulic fluid. Enter the excavator and turn the
key to the ON position or press the [ENTER CODE]
Button (Keyless Panel), but do not start the engine. Move
the joystick arm retract function to slowly lower the arm.

With rod end hose failure and NO accumulator

pressure:

Remove the arm base end hose from the arm load
holding valve. Place a container under the valve and
base end hose to contain hydraulic fluid.

Loosen the jam nut (Item 1). Install a hex wrench into the
valve screw (Item 2) [Figure 82] and slowly rotate the
screw clockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and allow the arm to
lower.

After the arm is lowered, rotate the screw (Item 2)

counterclockwise 1/8 to 1/4 turn and tighten the lock nut
(Item 1) [Figure 82]. Reinstall the base end hose.

59 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

59 of 246
DAILY INSPECTION

Daily Inspection And Maintenance WARNING

Figure 83
Operator must have instructions before operating the
machine. Untrained operators can cause injury or
death.
W-2001-0502
1
Fluids such as engine oil, hydraulic fluid, coolants, etc.
must be disposed of in an environmentally safe manner.
Some regulations require that certain spills and leaks on
the ground must be cleaned in a specific manner. See
local, state, and federal regulations for correct disposal.

P-97104
IMPORTANT
PRESSURE WASHING DECALS
Maintenance work must be done at regular intervals. • Never direct the stream at a low angle toward the
Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and early decal that could damage the decal causing it to

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

failures. The Service Schedule is a guide for correct peel from the surface.
maintenance of the Bobcat excavator. The decal (Item 1) • Direct the stream at a 90 degree angle and at
[Figure 83] is located inside the rear door. (See least 300 mm (12 in) from the decal. Wash from
SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.) the center of the decal toward the edges.
I-2226-0910
Check the following items before each day of operation:

• Operator Canopy or Cab (ROPS / TOPS) and

mounting hardware.
• Seat belt and mounting hardware. Replace seat belt if
damaged.
IMPORTANT
• Check for damaged decals, replace as needed. This machine is factory equipped with a U.S.D.A.
• Check control console lockout. Forestry Service approved spark arrester exhaust
system.
• Check X-Change System (if equipped) for damage or
loose parts.
The spark arrester muffler, if equipped, must be
• Air cleaner and intake hoses / clamps. cleaned to keep it in working condition. The spark
• Engine oil level and engine for leaks. arrester muffler must be serviced by dumping the
spark chamber every 100 hours of operation.
• Engine coolant level and engine for leaks.
• Check engine area for flammable materials. On some models, the turbocharger functions as the
spark arrester and must operate correctly for proper
• Check hydraulic fluid level and system for leaks. spark arrester function.
• Check indicator lights for correct operation.
If this machine is operated on flammable forest,
• Grease all pivot points.
brush, or grass covered land, it must be equipped
• Check cylinder and attachment pivot points. with a spark arrester attached to the exhaust system
• Check the track tension. and maintained in working order. Failure to do so will
be in violation of California State Law, Section 4442.
• Repair broken and loose parts. PRC. Refer to local laws and regulations for spark
• Check or clean cab heater filters (if equipped). arrester requirements.
I-2284-0111
• Check front horn and motion alarm (if equipped) for
proper function.

60 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

60 of 246
PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE

Operation & Maintenance Manual And Operator’s Entering The Excavator

Handbook Locations
Figure 86
Figure 84

P-97156
P-91990

Use the grab handles and tracks to enter the canopy /

Figure 85 cab [Figure 86].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

WARNING
1
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the
Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow
warnings and instructions in the manuals when
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
correct function after adjustments, repairs or
service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
P113073
instructions can cause injury or death.
W-2003-0807
Read and understand the Operation & Maintenance
Manual (Item 1) [Figure 84] (located inside the storage
box on the back of the operator’s seat) and the Operator’s
Handbook (Item 1) [Figure 85] before operating.

61 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

61 of 246
PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Seat Adjustment Seat Belt

Figure 87 Figure 88

1 4

2 5

P113009 P113010

Release the seat lever (Item 1) [Figure 87] to adjust the Fasten the seat belt [Figure 88].
seat forward or back.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Turn the handle (Item 2) to change the adjustment for
operator weight. Turn the handle until the operator’s
weight is shown in the window (Item 3) [Figure 87].

Release the lever (Item 4) [Figure 87] to change the

incline of the seat back.

Sit in the seat and turn the knob (Item 5) [Figure 87] to
adjust the height of the seat.

62 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

62 of 246
PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Control Console Mirror Adjustment

Figure 89 Figure 90

P-97995 P-92954

Lower the control console [Figure 89]. Adjust mirrors (Item 1) [Figure 90] (if equipped).

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: There is a control lock sensor in the left
console which deactivates the hydraulic
control levers (joysticks) and the traction
drive system when the control console is
raised. The console must be in the locked
down position for the hydraulic control levers
(joysticks) and traction system to operate.

NOTE: If the control lock sensor does not deactivate

the control levers and traction system when
console is raised, see your Bobcat dealer for
service.

63 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

63 of 246
STARTING THE ENGINE Figure 93
Key Switch

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH 1
• Fasten seat belt, start and operate only from the
operator’s seat. STOP
• Never wear loose clothing when working near ON
machine.
W-2135-1108
START

Perform the PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE. (See PRE- P113011A

STARTING PROCEDURE on Page 61.)
Figure 91
Turn the key (Item 1) [Figure 93] to the ON position. If
1 preheating is required, the glow plugs will automatically
FORWARD
cycle and the remaining preheat time (in seconds) will
show in the data display screen (see inset). (Preheat icon
NEUTRAL will be ON).

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Turn the key to START and release the key when the
engine starts. It will return to the ON position [Figure 93].
REVERSE
Stop the engine if the warning lights and alarm do not go
OFF. Check for the cause before starting the engine
again.
P-97998
Turn the key switch OFF to stop the engine.
Put control levers (Item 1) [Figure 91] in the NEUTRAL
position.
Figure 92
WARNING
1 AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning.
P113006 W-2050-0807

Turn the engine speed control dial (Item 1) [Figure 92]

counterclockwise to low idle

WARNING
IMPORTANT AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
• Engines can have hot parts and hot exhaust gas.
Do not engage the starter for longer than 15 seconds Keep flammable material away.
at a time. Longer use can damage the starter by • Do not use machines in atmosphere containing
overheating. Allow starter to cool for one minute explosive dust or gases.
before using starter again. W-2051-0212
I-2034-0700

64 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

64 of 246
STARTING THE ENGINE (CONT’D)

Keyless

Turn the start switch (Item 1) [Figure 95] to ON. The

indicator lights on the instrument panel will come ON
WARNING briefly and the Instrument Panel / monitoring system will
do a self test.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH Use the keypad (Item 2) [Figure 95] to enter the
• Fasten seat belt, start and operate only from the password.
operator’s seat.
• Never wear loose clothing when working near Figure 96
machine.
W-2135-1108

Perform the PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE. (See PRE-

STARTING PROCEDURE on Page 61.)
1
Figure 94 2

P-76461B

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

If preheating is required, the glow plugs will automatically
cycle based on temperature. The engine preheat icon
1 (Item 1) will be ON and the cycle time remaining (Item 2)
[Figure 96] will be shown on the data display.

When the engine preheat icon goes OFF, turn the start
switch (Item 1) [Figure 95] to START position and hold it
until the engine starts. Release the switch and it will
return to the ON position.
P113006

Rotate the engine speed control dial (Item 1) [Figure 94]

to low idle.
IMPORTANT
Do not engage the starter for longer than 15 seconds
Figure 95
at a time. Longer use can damage the starter by
overheating. Allow starter to cool for one minute
2 before using starter again.
STOP ON I-2034-0700

START
Turn the start switch (Item 1) [Figure 95] to the STOP
position to stop the engine.

Stop the engine if the warning lights and alarm do not go

OFF.
1
Check for the cause before starting the engine again.

Password Lockout Feature

P113012
See Password Lockout Feature. (See Password Lockout
Feature on Page 194.)

65 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

65 of 246
STARTING THE ENGINE (CONT’D) Figure 98

Deluxe Instrument Panel

1
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
• Engines can have hot parts and hot exhaust gas.
Keep flammable material away.
• Do not use machines in atmosphere containing
explosive dust or gases.
W-2051-0212 P113014

Perform the PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE. (See PRE-

STARTING PROCEDURE on Page 61.) Turn the start switch (Item 2) [Figure 97] to ON. The
message [ENTER PASSWORD] will appear on the
Figure 97 display screen if the deluxe instrument panel is locked. (If
not locked, use the start switch without a password to
start the engine.)

Use the numeric keypad (Item 1) [Figure 98] to enter the

1
password.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

STOP ON
Figure 99
START
1
2

P113013

Set the engine speed control (Item 1) [Figure 97] to the

P113016
low idle position.

NOTE: Excavators with a Deluxe Instrument Panel If preheating is required, the glow plugs will automatically
have a permanent, randomly generated cycle and the engine preheat icon (Item 1) [Figure 99]
Master Password set at the factory. Your and will be shown in the data display.
excavator will also be assigned an Owner
Password. Your dealer will provide you with When the engine preheat icon goes OFF, turn the start
this password. Change the owner password switch to START (Item 3). Release the switch when the
to one that you will easily remember to engine starts and allow it to return to the ON position
prevent unauthorized use of your excavator. (Item 2) [Figure 98].
(See Changing The Owner Password on Page
Turn the start button (Item 2) [Figure 97] to the STOP
195.) Keep your password in a safe location
position to stop the engine.
for future needs.
Stop the engine if the warning lights and alarm do not go
NOTE: The Password Lockout feature can be used to OFF.
allow starting of the excavator without a
password. If unlocked, the start switch will Check for the cause before starting the engine again.
start the machine without using a password.
Password Lockout Feature
(See Password Lockout Feature on Page 194.)
See Password Lockout Feature. (See Password Lockout
Feature on Page 194.)

66 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

66 of 246
STARTING THE ENGINE (CONT’D)

Warming The Hydraulic System Cold Temperature Starting

IMPORTANT WARNING
When the temperature is below -30°C (-20°F), EXPLOSION CAN CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY, DEATH
hydrostatic oil must be warmed before starting. The OR SEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE
hydrostatic system will not get enough oil at low DO NOT use ether or starting fluid with glow plug or
temperatures and will be damaged. Park the machine air intake heater systems.
in an area where the temperature will be above -18°C W-2071-0415
(0°F) if possible.
I-2007-0910 If the temperature is below freezing, perform the following
to make starting the engine easier:
Let the engine run at least 5 minutes to warm the engine
and hydraulic fluid before operating the excavator. • Replace the engine oil with the correct type and
viscosity for the anticipated starting temperature.
(See Engine Oil Chart on Page 152.)
• Make sure the battery is fully charged.
• Install an engine heater.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: If the battery is discharged (but not frozen) a
booster battery can be used to jump start the
excavator. (See Using A Booster Battery
(Jump Starting) on Page 161.)

NOTE: The display screen on the instrument panel

may not be at full intensity when the
temperature is below -26°C (-15°F). The
display screen may take 30 seconds to
several minutes to warm up. All systems
remain monitored even when the display
screen is off.

67 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

67 of 246
MONITORING THE DISPLAY PANELS

Instrument Panel

Figure 100 NOTE: The optional Deluxe Instrumentation Panel

offers an additional view of service codes that
includes a brief description. (See
DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES on Page 184.)

Warning And Shutdown

When a WARNING condition exists; the associated icon

2 light is ON and the alarm sounds 3 beeps. If this
1 condition is allowed to continue, there may be damage to
the engine or hydraulic systems.
NA3172
When a SHUTDOWN condition exists; the associated
icon light is ON and the alarm sounds continuously. The
monitoring system will automatically stop the engine in
15 seconds. The engine can be restarted to move or
relocate the excavator.

The SHUTDOWN feature is associated with the following

1 icons:

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

General Warning
Engine Malfunction
3 3 P113015B Engine Coolant Temperature
Hydraulic Fluid Temperature
Frequently monitor the temperature and fuel gauges
[Figure 100].

After the engine is running, frequently monitor the

instrument panel [Figure 100] for machine condition.

The associated icon is displayed if there is an error

condition.

EXAMPLE: Engine Coolant Temperature is High.

The Engine Coolant Temperature icon (Item 1)

[Figure 100] is ON.

Press the Information button (Item 2) (Standard Panel) or

press a scroll button (Item 3) [Figure 100] (Deluxe Panel)
repeatedly to cycle the data display until the service code
screen is displayed. One of the following SERVICE
CODES is displayed.

• [M0810] Engine Coolant Temperature Too High

• [M0811] Engine Coolant Temperature Extremely

High

Find the cause of the service code and correct before

operating the excavator again. (See DIAGNOSTIC
SERVICE CODES on Page 184.)

68 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

68 of 246
STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE EXCAVATOR

Procedure

Figure 101 Figure 103

ON
STOP START

P-97224

7161794A

Stop the machine on level ground. Lower the work

equipment and the blade to the ground [Figure 101]. Turn the switch to STOP [Figure 103].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 102 Disconnect the seat belt. Remove the key from the switch
(If Equipped) to prevent operation of machine by
unauthorized personnel. Raise the control console and
exit the machine.

P113006

Rotate the engine speed control dial (Item 1)

[Figure 102] counterclockwise to low idle.

Run the engine at idle speed for about 5 minutes to allow

it to cool.

69 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

69 of 246
ATTACHMENTS Figure 105
Installing And Removing The Attachment (Hydraulic
X-Change)
Installation

NOTE: Installation and removal of the bucket is

shown. The procedure is the same for other 1
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines
that are operated by hydraulic power before
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.). P-91903B

WARNING Press and hold the X-Change switch (Item 1)

[Figure 105] to the right (IN) to fully retract the hydraulic
pins.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Figure 106
Never use attachments or buckets which are not
approved by Bobcat Company. Buckets and
attachments for safe loads of specified densities are
approved for each model. Unapproved attachments
can cause injury or death.
W-2052-0907

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Both hydraulic pins must be fully extended through
the attachment mounting holes. Failure to fully P-71986A
engage the hydraulic pins can allow attachment to
come off.
W-2935-0512 Move the arm toward the attachment [Figure 106].

Figure 107
Figure 104

P-97158 P-71989A

Start the engine. Raise the boom until the X-Change pins (Item 1) engage
the attachment hooks (Item 2) [Figure 107] on the
Swing the excavator arm fully to the left [Figure 104] (for
bucket.
better operator visibility when connecting attachments).

70 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

70 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Hydraulic X-Change) (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 108 Figure 109

1
2 P-91903B
3
Press and hold the X-Change switch (Item 1)
P-71993A [Figure 109] to the left (OUT) and FULLY EXTEND the
hydraulic pins.

Raise the boom and extend (curl in) the bucket cylinder Figure 110

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

until the X-Change contacts the back of the attachment
[Figure 108].

With the arm vertical, lower the boom until the hooks
(Item 1) of the bucket disengage the X-Change pins (Item 1
2) and the plate (Item 3) [Figure 108] fully engages into
the bucket crossmember.

WARNING
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
P-69010
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
W-2119-0910
Check that both hydraulic pins (Item 1) [Figure 110] are
fully engaged to secure the attachment.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Both hydraulic pins must be fully extended through
the attachment mounting holes. Failure to fully
engage the hydraulic pins can allow attachment to
come off.
W-2935-0512

71 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

71 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Hydraulic X-Change) (Cont’d)

Removal

NOTE: Removal and installation of the bucket is Figure 113

shown. The procedure is the same for other
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines 2
that are operated by hydraulic power before
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.).
1
2

WARNING
1
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
W-2119-0910
P-69008B
Figure 111

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Raise the boom and retract the bucket cylinder until the
X-Change pins (Item 1) engage the attachment hooks
(Item 2) [Figure 113] on the bucket.

Figure 114

P-69004C

Park the excavator on a flat level surface. Put the

attachment on the ground [Figure 111].
Figure 112
P-69006B

Fully retract the bucket cylinder (bucket dump).

Lower the boom and arm until the attachment is on the

ground and the X-Change pins are disengaged from the
attachment hooks.
1
Move the arm toward the excavator until the X-Change
P-91903B pins are clear of the attachment [Figure 114].

Press and hold the X-Change switch (Item 1)

[Figure 112] on the left console to the right (IN) to
FULLY RETRACT the hydraulic pins.

72 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

72 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin Grabber Quick Coupler)

Installation

NOTE: Installation and removal of the bucket is

shown. The procedure is the same for other
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines
that are operated by hydraulic power before WARNING
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.).
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
The quick coupler locking clasps must be fully
engaged and locked to the attachment pins. Failure
WARNING to fully engage the locking clasps can allow
attachment to come off.
W-2978-0317
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never use attachments or buckets which are not
Figure 116
approved by Bobcat Company. Buckets and
attachments for safe loads of specified densities are
approved for each model. Unapproved attachments
can cause injury or death.
W-2052-0907

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Start the engine. (See PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE on 1
Page 61.)

Figure 115

P113001

Figure 117

P113075

Move the right joystick (Item 1) [Figure 116] to the left

(IN) and curl the coupler (Item 1) [Figure 117] toward the
P113077 cab fully.

Position the arm and coupler to the attachment

[Figure 115].

73 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

73 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin Figure 120

Grabber Quick Coupler) (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 118

1 1
1

P113078A

Roll the coupler out. Move the arm toward the

attachment. Reposition the boom, arm and coupler until
P113074 the coupler (Item 1) [Figure 120] is position over the
attachment pin. Raise the attachment up slightly.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Press the coupler ON / OFF switch (Item 1) [Figure 118] Figure 121
to the left (ON) position to enable the pin grabber quick
coupler feature. The switch will illuminate when in the ON
position and a buzzer will sound.
Press and release the INTENT switch (Item 2) within five
seconds. (The buzzer will continue to sound and the light
(Item 1) [Figure 118] will stay ON.)
NOTE: If pin grabber quick coupler, the switch and /
or the buzzer do not operate correctly, see
troubleshooting chart. (See Pin Grabber
Quick Coupler Troubleshooting on Page 175.)

Figure 119

P113079

1 Curl the quick coupler in fully [Figure 121].

Press the coupler ON / OFF switch (Item 1) [Figure 118]

to the right, (OFF) position. The switch light and buzzer
will turn OFF.
Continue to curl the attachment in for an additional ten
seconds to allow the locking clasp to move and lock to
the attachment pins.

With the attachment as low to the ground as possible,

P113076
curl the attachment out and in several times to ensure the
attachment is secured to the coupler.
Continue to curl the quick coupler until the locking clasp
(Item 1) [Figure 119] moves in fully. Lower the attachment flat to the ground.

74 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

74 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin

Grabber Quick Coupler) (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 122

P113080

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Visually check that the green locking clasp (Item 1)
[Figure 122] is FULLY ENGAGED AND LOCKED.

WARNING
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
W-2119-0910

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
The quick coupler locking clasps must be fully
engaged and locked to the attachment pins. Failure
to fully engage the locking clasps can allow
attachment to come off.
W-2978-0317

75 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

75 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin Grabber Quick Coupler) (Cont’d)

Removal Figure 125

NOTE: Removal and installation of the bucket is 1

shown. The procedure is the same for other
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines
that are operated by hydraulic power before
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.).
2

WARNING
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
P113074
W-2119-0910

Figure 123 Press the coupler ON / OFF switch (Item 1) [Figure 125]
to the left (ON) position to enable the pin grabber quick
coupler feature. The switch will illuminate when in the ON

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

position and a buzzer will sound.

Press and release the INTENT switch (Item 2) within five

seconds. (The buzzer will continue to sound and the light
1 (Item 1) [Figure 125] will stay ON.)

Move the right joystick (Item 1) [Figure 123] to the left

(IN) and continue to curl the quick coupler [Figure 124].
The coupler locking clasps will lift fully to unlock the
P113001 attachment from the quick coupler.

Figure 126
Figure 124

P113078
P113079

With the attachment slightly off of the ground, roll the

Move the right joystick (Item 1) [Figure 123] to the left quick coupler back until the coupler starts to disengage
(IN) and curl the quick coupler (Item 1) [Figure 124] fully. from the attachment [Figure 126].

76 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

76 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin

Grabber Quick Coupler) (Cont’d)

Removal (Cont’d)

Figure 127

P113081

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Roll the quick coupler back fully.

Lower the boom and arm until the attachment is on the

ground and the quick coupler is disengaged from the
attachment pins.

Move the arm away the excavator until the quick coupler
is clear of the attachment [Figure 127].

Figure 128

P113074

Press the coupler ON / OFF switch (Item 1) [Figure 128]

to the right, (OFF) position. The switch light and buzzer
will turn OFF.

77 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

77 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change)

Installation

NOTE: Installation and removal of the bucket is Figure 130

shown. The procedure is the same for other
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines
that are operated by hydraulic power before
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.).

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never use attachments or buckets which are not
approved by Bobcat Company. Buckets and
attachments for safe loads of specified densities are
approved for each model. Unapproved attachments
can cause injury or death.
W-2052-0907

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

WARNING
Both hydraulic pins must be fully extended through
the attachment mounting holes and locked with both
retainer pins and clips. Failure to fully engage and
lock hydraulic pins can allow attachment to come off
and cause serious injury or death.
W-2507-0706 P-49836

Figure 129 Start the engine and move the arm toward the bucket
[Figure 130].

2 1 2

P-49705

Inspect the pin (Item 1) [Figure 129] for wear or damage.

Replace the pin as needed.

Apply a light coat of grease to the ends of the pin (Item 2)

[Figure 129].

78 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

78 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change) (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 131 Figure 132

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1 1

2
3

P-49835 P-49837

Raise the boom until the pins (Item 1) engage the hooks Raise the boom and extend the bucket cylinder until the
(Item 2) [Figure 131] on the bucket. X-Change contacts the attachment back [Figure 132].

With the arm vertical, lower the boom until the hooks
(Item 1) of the bucket disengage the pins (Item 2) of the
X-Change and the plate (Item 3) [Figure 132] fully
engages in the bucket crossmember.

WARNING
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.
W-2119-0910

79 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

79 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change) (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 133

P-49706

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Stop the engine. Turn the start key to the ON position and
move both hydraulic control levers to relieve hydraulic
pressure.

Drive the pin (Item 1) [Figure 133] through the bucket

mount and X-Change.

Figure 134

P-49708

Install the retainer pin (Item 1) [Figure 134].

Check for proper installation.

Lift the attachment and fully extend and retract the bucket
cylinder.

80 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

80 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change) (Cont’d)

Removal Figure 135

Use the pin on X-Change when installing new

attachments that are equipped with the pin on X-Change
bracket.

NOTE: Removal and installation of the bucket is

shown. The procedure is the same for other
attachments. Disconnect any hydraulic lines
that are operated by hydraulic power before
removing any attachments (breaker, auger,
etc.).

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never use attachments or buckets which are not

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

approved by Bobcat Company. Buckets and
attachments for safe loads of specified densities are
approved for each model. Unapproved attachments
can cause injury or death.
W-2052-0907

P-49838

Park the excavator on a flat level surface. Put the bucket

on the ground [Figure 135].

With the engine off, turn the start key to the ON position
and move both hydraulic control levers to relieve
hydraulic pressure.

81 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

81 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-Change) (Cont’d)

Removal (Cont’d)

Figure 136

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
1 of the following conditions exist:
• When fluids are under pressure.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907

Figure 138
P-49710

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Remove the retainer pin (Item 1) [Figure 136].

Figure 137

P-49711

Drive the pin (Item 1) [Figure 137] out of the bucket and
X-Change mount.

P-49835

Start the engine, raise the boom approximately one foot

and retract the bucket cylinder until the X-Change pins
(Item 1) engage the hooks (Item 2) [Figure 138] on the
bucket.

82 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

82 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On X-

Change) (Cont’d)

Removal (Cont’d)

Figure 139

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

2
1

P-49836

Fully retract the bucket cylinder and lower the boom and
arm until the bucket is on the ground, and the X-Change
pins (Item 1) are disengaged from the hooks (Item 2)
[Figure 139].

Move the arm toward the excavator until the X-Change

pins are clear of the bucket.

83 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

83 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Attachment (Pin-On Attachment)

Installation

Figure 141

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Stop the machine on a firm flat surface. When 1
removing or installing attachments (such as a
bucket), always have a second person in the
operator’s seat, give clear signals and work carefully.
W-2140-0189 1

Figure 140

P-66528A

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1 Install the two retainer pins (Item 1) [Figure 141]. Install
grease in the grease fittings.

Removal

2 Park the excavator on a flat surface and lower the bucket

fully.

Remove the two retainer pins (Item 1) [Figure 141].

3
P-66527A
Remove the washers and pins (Items 1 and 3)
[Figure 140].
Install the arm into the bucket and align the mounting
hole. Do not damage the dust seals in the arm.

Install the pin (Item 1) [Figure 140] and washers.

Install the link (Item 2) in the bucket and align the

mounting hole. Install the pin (Item 3) [Figure 140] and
WARNING
washers.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never use attachments or buckets which are not
approved by Bobcat Company. Buckets and
attachments for safe loads of specified densities are
approved for each model. Unapproved attachments
can cause injury or death.
W-2052-0907

84 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

84 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool

Installation Figure 142

WARNING
2
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Keep fingers and hands out of pinch points when 1 3
installing and removing implement or attachment.
W-2571-1212 4
P116106

WARNING
3
Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment 2 1
when operating. Contact with moving parts, a trench
cave-in or flying objects can cause injury or death.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

W-2119-0910

4 P116101
Enter the excavator and start the engine. (See PRE-
STARTING PROCEDURE on Page 61.)
NOTE: To install the clamp tool (Item 1) onto the
clamp base (Item 2), the clamp tool (Item 1)
can be positioned in either configuration as
shown in [Figure 142].

Move the arm toward the clamp tool.

Engage the clamp base hooks (Item 3) onto the clamp

anchors (Item 4) [Figure 142].

Figure 143

P116102

Retract the bucket cylinder (Item 1) [Figure 143] until the

clamp tool is supported by the clamp hooks and the tool
anchors.

85 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

85 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 144 Figure 146

1 2
1

P116103
P116105

Raise the boom until the clamp tool (Item 1) [Figure 144] Rotate the bucket (Item 1) [Figure 146] down until it is in

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

is slightly off the ground. the position shown. Lower the boom until the bucket is
fully on the ground.
Figure 145
The bottom of the clamp tool (Item 2) [Figure 146] must
be slightly off the ground when the bucket is resting on
the ground in order to rotate the tool to install the pins.
B
NOTE: The clamp tool can become unstable and fall
off the clamp mount if the clamp tool (Item 2)
[Figure 146] is allowed to contact the ground.

NOTE: The clamp tool (Item 2) can be positioned in

multiple arrangements depending on which
mounting holes are used. See [Figure 147]
1 and [Figure 148] for the approved positions
for the clamp tool.

P116104 Stop the engine and exit the excavator. (See STOPPING
THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE EXCAVATOR on
Page 69.)
Continue to retract the bucket cylinder until the clamp tool
(Item 1) [Figure 145] slides into the (index point B)
[Figure 144] and [Figure 145].

86 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

86 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)
Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)
Installation (Cont’d)
Material Tool Arrangements
Figure 147
PRO CLAMP SYSTEM 4 APPROVED TOOL ARRANGEMENTS
USE CHECKED INDEX BASE ASSEMBLY INDEX MATERIAL CLAMP TOOL INDEX*
POINT WHEN
INSTALLING TOOL. A
B 3 1 2 3
INSTALL MOUNTING 2
PINS IN CHECKED
MOUNTING HOLES.
1

APPROVED INDEX POINT MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

TOOL POSITIONS A B 1 2 3 1 2 3
TOOTHED DIRT BUCKET

X X X X X

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

TOOTHED DIRT BUCKET

X X X X X

TOOTHLESS DIRT BUCKET

X X X X X

TOOTHLESS DIRT BUCKET

X X X X X

* Material Tool Weight: 27 kg (60 lb)

87 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

87 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Grading And Clam Tool Arrangements

Figure 148

PRO CLAMP SYSTEM 3 APPROVED TOOL ARRANGEMENTS

BASE ASSEMBLY INDEX GRADING & CLAM TOOL INDEX*

USE CHECKED INDEX
POINT WHEN A
INSTALLING TOOL. B 3
2 1 3
2
INSTALL MOUNTING 1
PINS IN CHECKED
MOUNTING HOLES.

APPROVED INDEX POINT MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

TOOL POSITIONS A B 1 2 3 1 2 3

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

TOOTHED DIRT BUCKET **

X X X X X

TOOTHLESS DIRT BUCKET

X X X X X

GRADING BUCKET

X X X X X

* Grading And Clam Tool Weight: 30 kg (65 lb)

** Note: See the correct operating procedure when using the grading tool for grading. (See Using The Pro Clamp
System on Page 99.)

88 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

88 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 149

WARNING
A
B AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
3 Keep fingers and hands out of pinch points when
2 installing and removing implement or attachment.
W-2571-1212

1 Figure 151

P-116082

For aligning the clamp tool and base assembly, there are
three mounting holes (Item 1, 2 and 3). For indexing the
clamp tool, there are two indexing points on the base
assembly (Item A and B) [Figure 149].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1
Use [Figure 147] and [Figure 148] to determine which
index point is used for the desired tool position.

Figure 150

A P-116169
B

Install a pin (Item 1) [Figure 151] in the mounting hole on

each side. Install the lock pins (Item 1) [Figure 154].

NOTE: When installing the clamp tool, always install

the pins in the hole 1 [Figure 149] first. Hole 1
[Figure 149] will always be used for mounting
the tools.

NOTE: When repositioning or removing the Pro

P-116105 Clamp system tool, remove the pins from
positions 2 or 3 first. The pin in location 1
Move the clamp tool along the base assembly to the should always be the last pin removed or the
desired indexing point (A or B) [Figure 150]. first pin installed [Figure 149].

NOTE: The clamp tool anchors must be located in one

of the indexing points on the base assembly
for the mounting holes to align. The base
assembly hooks are for lifting the clamp tool
only. The hooks cannot be used as an
indexing point for mounting hole alignment.

Lifting the bottom of the clamp tool, use the anchors and
indexing point as a hinge to align the mounting holes
(Item 1) [Figure 150].

89 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

89 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)

Installation (Cont’d)

Figure 152 Figure 154

P-116107 P-116108

Rotate the clamp tool to the desired angle, aligning the Install the retaining pins (Item 1) [Figure 154].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

other mounting holes [Figure 152].
Note: Always install ALL of the mounting pins and
Figure 153 the retaining pins.

1
IMPORTANT
Always install all of the mounting pins and retainer
pins. Failure to do so will cause structural damage.
I-2380-0314

P-116099

Install the pins (Item 1) [Figure 153].

90 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

90 of 246
ATTACHMENTS (CONT’D)

Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System Tool (Cont’d)

Removal

Figure 155 Lift on the bottom of the clamp tool using the anchors as
a fulcrum to take pressure off of the pins (Item 2) and
remove pins (Item 2) [Figure 156] (both sides). Rotate
the tool down until it hangs freely straight down.

Figure 157
2

1
P116098

Park the excavator on a flat and level surface. Position

the bucket as shown in [Figure 155] and lower the boom

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

until the bucket is fully on the ground.
P116102
Stop the engine and exit the excavator.

Remove the retainer pins (Item 1) [Figure 154].

Slightly raise the boom and retract the bucket cylinder
NOTE: When repositioning or removing the Pro fully. Lower the boom until the tip of the clamp tool is
Clamp system tool, remove the pins from touching the ground. Extend the clamp cylinder and
positions 2 or 3 first. The pin in location 1 slightly lower the boom and rotate the clamp tool forward
should always be the last pin removed or the until the clamp tool is fully on the ground [Figure 157].
first pin installed [Figure 149].

Hold the bottom of the clamp tool (Item 1) and remove Figure 158
the pin (Item 2) [Figure 155] from each side.

Figure 156

P116101
2

Lower the boom and move the arm forward until the
hooks of the clamp mount (Item 1) are disengaged from
P116129 the clamp tool anchors (Item 2) [Figure 158].

Rotate the clamp tool until the anchors (Item 1)

[Figure 156] are contacting the indexing point.

91 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

91 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE

Inspect The Work Area Lowering The Work Equipment (Engine STOPPED)

Before beginning operation, inspect the work area for The hydraulic control levers control the movement of the
unsafe conditions. boom, arm, bucket and upperstructure slew functions.

Look for sharp drop-offs or rough terrain. Have The console must be in the locked down position, and the
underground utility lines (gas, electrical, water, sewer, key switch in the ON position.
irrigation, etc.) located and marked. Work slowly in areas
of underground utilities. Use the control lever to lower the boom.

Remove objects or other construction material that could Figure 159

damage the excavator or cause personal injury.

Always check ground conditions before starting your

work:

• Look for signs of instability such as cracks or

settlement.

• Be aware of weather conditions that can affect ground

stability.

• Check for adequate traction if working on a slope.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Basic Operating Instructions

When operating on a public road or highway, always P-97995

follow local regulations. For example: A slow moving
vehicle (SMV) sign, or direction signals may be required.
The joystick lock switch disengages the hydraulic control
Run the engine at low idle speed to warm the engine and functions from the joysticks when the console are raised
hydraulic system before operating the excavator. [Figure 159].

NOTE: If the engine stops, the boom / bucket

(attachments) can be lowered to the ground

IMPORTANT using hydraulic pressure in the accumulator.

The control console must be in the locked

Machines warmed up with moderate engine speed down position, and the key switch in the ON
and light load have longer life. position.
I-2015-0284
Use the control lever to lower the boom.
New operators must operate the excavator in an open
area without bystanders. Operate the controls until the Lower the control console to engage the hydraulic control
excavator can be handled at an efficient and safe rate for functions of the joysticks [Figure 159].
all conditions of the work area.

Operating Near An Edge Or Water

Keep the excavator as far back from the edge as possible

and the excavator tracks perpendicular to the edge so
that if part of the edge collapses, the excavator can be
moved back.

Always move the excavator back at any indication the

edge may be unstable.

92 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

92 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Object Handling

Do not exceed the Rated Lift Capacity. (See Lift Chart

(7188434) With Standard Arm on Page 204.) or (See Lift
Chart (7188436) With Long Arm on Page 210.)

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Do not exceed rated lift capacity. Excessive load can
cause tipping or loss of control.
W-2374-0500

Extend the bucket cylinder completely and lower the

boom to the ground. Stop the engine.

Wrap the chain assembly around the bucket mounting

plate.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 160

NA1424

Make sure the load is evenly weighted and centered on

the lifting chain, and is secured to prevent the load from
shifting [Figure 160].

Lift and position the load. Once the load is in position and
tension is removed from the lift chain (secondary lift
system), remove the secondary lift system.

93 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

93 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)
Object Handling With The Lifting Device

The excavator must be equipped with the optional lift eye Figure 162
link (Item 1) [Figure 162], the boom and arm load hold
valves and the overload warning device option. See your
Bobcat dealer for available Kits.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
• Do not exceed rated lift capacity.
• Excessive load can cause tipping or loss of
control.
• Excessive load can cause failure of the lift eye
and cause the load to drop. 1
W-2991-0714

Do not exceed the machine’s Rated Lift Capacity or the 2

Rated Lift Load (RLL) of the lifting device (lift eye). (See
Lift Chart (7188434) With Standard Arm on Page 204.),

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113545
(See Lift Chart (7188442) With Standard Arm W/
Counterweight on Page 207.) or (See Lift Chart (7188436)
With Long Arm on Page 210.) Install the clevis (Item 2) through the lift eye (Item 1)
[Figure 162].
Make sure the secondary lifting system (chain) is of
sufficient strength to lift the object. NOTE: Visually check the lifting eye, the clevis and
the secondary lifting system (chain) for any
Figure 161 damage. Replace any damage components
before lifting. See your Bobcat dealer for
replacement lift eye and clevis.

P113713A

The maximum RLL (Item 1) [Figure 161] is shown on the

lifting device.

Extend the bucket cylinder completely and lower the

boom to the ground. Stop the engine. Exit the excavator.
(See STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE
EXCAVATOR on Page 69.)

94 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

94 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)
Object Handling With The Lifting Device

Figure 163 Figure 165

1
P113708

P113565
Make sure the load is evenly weighted and centered on
the lifting chain (or other type of lifting device), and is
Install a lift chain (Item 1) (or other type of lifting device) secured to prevent the load from shifting [Figure 165].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

through the clevis (Item 2) [Figure 163] and connect to
the object to be lifted. Operate the controls slowly and smoothly to avoid
suddenly swinging the lifted load.
NOTE: Always use chains or other types of lifting
devices that are intended for this type of use Lift and position the load. When the load is placed in a
and that are of adequate strength for the secured position and tension is removed from the lift
object being lifted. chain, remove the chain from the load and from the lift
eye.
Enter the excavator, fasten the seat belt and start the
engine. (See PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE on Page
61.)

Figure 164

P113531

Press the switch (Item 1) [Figure 164] to the left to

activate the overload warning device.

95 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

95 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Lift Capacity WARNING

The lifting capacities were calculated with a machine that
was equipped with a standard bucket and the pin-on X- AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
change. The difference between the weight of the Do not exceed rated lift capacity. Excessive load can
attachment and the standard bucket, the pin-on X- cause tipping or loss of control.
change and the quick coupler (if equipped), and the W-2374-0500
hydraulic clamp (if equipped) must be subtracted.

Figure 166

EXAMPLE OF

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

LIFT CAPACITY
CHART

* 1246 kg
(2746 lb)

7188434

The following example will show how to calculate the lift capacity differences between the lift capacity charts with standard
equipment and when using optional equipment.
The standard equipment weights used when determining lift capacity are as follows:
Standard Bucket = 142 kg (313 lb)
Pin-On X-Change = 28 Kg (62 lb)

The following lists the weight of the optional quick couplers and hydraulic clamp:
• Pin-on X-Change = 28 kg (62 lb)
• Hydraulic X-Change = 40 kg (87 lb)
• Pin Grabber Quick Coupler = 65 kg (143 lb)
• Lehnhoff Quick Coupler = 30 kg (66 lb)
• Klac Quick Coupler = 43 kg (95 lb)
• TAG Quick Coupler = 26 kg (58 lb)
• Hydraulic Clamp And Cylinder = 86 kg (190 lb)
• Hydraulic Pro-Clamp, Clamp Tool And Cylinder = 144 kg (317 lb)
• Optional Buckets And Attachments (See NOTE below)

NOTE: For bucket weights, see your Bobcat dealer. For attachment weights, see the attachment Operation &
Maintenance Manual.

96 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

96 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Lift Capacity (Cont’d)

The following is an example for determining the lift capacity using the sample chart shown above [Figure 166].

- Machine Position: Over Blade, Blade Down

- Lift Radius: 4000 mm (125.5 in)
- Lift Point Height: 2000 mm (78.7 in)
- Hydraulic X-Change
- Hydraulic Clamp and Cylinder
- Standard Bucket

1. Obtain Lift Capacity from Chart: 1246 kg (2746 lb)

2. Subtract the difference between the weight of the standard configuration (Pin-On X-change and Standard Bucket) and
optional equipment which in this case is the Hydraulic X-Change and the Hydraulic Clamp.

Quick Coupler (Pin-On X-Change minus Hydraulic X-change): 28 kg (62 lb) - 40 kg (87 lb) = minus 12 kg (25 lb)
Hydraulic Clamp and Cylinder: 86 kg (190 lb)

3. Calculate actual Lift Capacity for machine as configured:

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1246 kg (2746 lb) - 12 kg (25 lb) (coupler difference) - 86 kg (190 lb) (hydraulic clamp and cylinder) = 1148 kg (2531 lb)

* The lift capacity charts (decals) are based off of ISO 10567: 2007. The lifting capacities are defined as the lower value
of 75% of tipping load or 87% of the hydraulic lift capacity.

97 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

97 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Using The Clamp

Figure 167 When Using Primary Auxiliary Hydraulics To Activate

Clamp

Engage the auxiliary hydraulics and toggle to the Aux2

setting. (See Auxiliary Hydraulics - Standard Instrument
Panel on Page 47.)

Figure 168
LEFT HAND CONTROL RIGHT HAND CONTROL
LEVER (JOYSTICK) LEVER (JOYSTICK)
SECONDARY AUXILIARY PRIMARY AUXILIARY
HYDRAULICS HYDRAULICS

2 1
N-15513

The optional lifting clamp attachment gives the excavator

a wider range of use and mobility for debris removal

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[Figure 167].

The lifting clamp cylinder must be fully retracted when the

machine is being used for excavating.
P113017
The lift capacities are reduced by 99 kg (218 lb) if the
excavator is equipped with the optional lifting clamp.
Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 168] on the right control
NOTE: Use care when operating the bucket and lever to the right to open the clamp. Move the switch to
clamp functions on machines equipped with the left to close the clamp.
an X-Change and without a bucket or
attachment installed. Cylinder damage can When Using Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics To Activate
occur due to contact between the X-Change Clamp
and the clamp when both cylinders are fully
extended. Move the switch (Item 2) [Figure 168] on the left control
lever to the left open the clamp. Move the switch to the
right to close the clamp.

98 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

98 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Using The Pro Clamp System

The lift capacities of the excavator will be reduced by 144 Operating With The Grading Tool
kg (317 lb) with the optional Pro Clamp system installed.
(See Lift Capacity on Page 96.)

Engage the auxiliary hydraulics and toggle to the Aux2

setting. (See Auxiliary Hydraulics - Standard Instrument
IMPORTANT
Panel on Page 47.) or (See Auxiliary Hydraulics - Deluxe When using the Pro Clamp System with the Grading
Instrument Panel on Page 49.) Tool, the Grading Tool must not be used with the
cylinder fully extended and unsupported. It is
Figure 169 necessary to support the Grading Tool with the
LEFT HAND CONTROL RIGHT HAND CONTROL bucket to avoid damaging the clamp cylinder.
I-2381-1015
LEVER (JOYSTICK) LEVER (JOYSTICK)
SECONDARY AUXILIARY PRIMARY AUXILIARY
HYDRAULICS HYDRAULICS Figure 170

2 INCORRECT
1

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-91922 P116132

CORRECT
Move the switch (Item 1) [Figure 169] on the right control
lever to the right to open the clamp. Move the switch to
the left to close the clamp.

Using Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulics To Activate Clamp

Move the switch (Item 2) [Figure 169] on the left control

lever to the left open the clamp. Move the switch to the
right to close the clamp.
1
Before connecting and disconnecting auxiliary hydraulic
quick couplers, relieve hydraulic pressure. (See Relieve
Hydraulic Pressure With Standard Instrument Panel
P116133
(Excavator And Attachment) on Page 50.), (See Relieve
Hydraulic Pressure With Deluxe Instrument Panel
(Excavator And Attachment) on Page 50.) or (See When using the Pro Clamp with the Grading Tool, the
Relieve Secondary Auxiliary Hydraulic Pressure Grading Tool must not be used with the cylinder fully
(Excavator And Attachment) on Page 51.) extended and unsupported. It is necessary to support the
Grading Tool with the bucket to avoid damaging the
For installing and removing the Pro Clamp system tools, clamp cylinder. Position the bucket to the clamp grading
(See Installing And Removing The Pro Clamp System tool as shown [Figure 170].
Tool on Page 85.)
NOTE: The clamp grading tool plate (Item 1)
[Figure 170] must be in contact with the
bucket or bucket teeth when using the tool for
grading.

99 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

99 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Boom Swing

Figure 171 Figure 174

NA1433B

Figure 172

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NA1432

The boom swing allows the operator to offset the boom

and dig close to buildings and other structures
NA1420B
[Figure 174].
Figure 173

NA1434B

Slew the upperstructure, swing the boom to the right

[Figure 171], center [Figure 172] and left [Figure 173]
to dig a square hole the width of the machine without
repositioning the excavator.

100 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

100 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Driving The Excavator

When operating on uneven ground, operate as slow as Figure 176

possible and avoid sudden changes in direction.

Avoid traveling over objects such as rocks, trees, stumps,

etc.

When working on wet or soft ground, put planks on the

ground to provide a solid base to travel on and prevent
the excavator from getting stuck.

Figure 175

NA1422

The bucket may also be used to pull the excavator. Raise

the blade, extend the arm and lower the boom. Operate

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Plank the boom and arm in a digging manner [Figure 176].

NA1440

If one or both tracks have become stuck in soft or wet

ground, raise one track at a time by turning the
upperstructure and pushing the bucket against the
ground [Figure 175].

Put planks under the tracks and drive the excavator to dry
ground.

101 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

101 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Operating On Slopes

WARNING
WARNING AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
• Avoid steep areas or banks that could break
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH away.
• Do not travel across or up slopes that are over 15 • Keep boom centered and attachments as low as
degrees. possible when traveling on slopes or in rough
• Do not travel down or back up slopes that exceed conditions. Look in the direction of travel.
25 degrees. • Always fasten seat belt.
• Look in the direction of travel. W-2498-0304
W-2497-0304

Figure 178
When going down a slope, control the speed with the
steering levers and the speed control lever. Traveling Up Slopes

Figure 177
Traveling Down or Backing Up Slopes

304 mm

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

(12 in)
Maximum

15 Maximum

NA1447
25 Maximum

Figure 179
NA1448
Traveling On Side Slopes

When going down grades that exceed 15 degrees, put

the machine in the position shown, and run the engine
slowly [Figure 177].

Operate as slow as possible and avoid sudden changes

in lever direction.

Avoid traveling over objects such as rocks, trees, stumps,

etc.

Stop the machine before moving the upper equipment

controls. Never allow the blade to strike a solid object.
Damage to the blade or hydraulic cylinder can result.
15 Maximum
NA1449

When traveling up slopes or on side slopes that are 15

degrees or less, position the machine as shown and run
the engine slow [Figure 178] and [Figure 179].

102 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

102 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Operating On Slopes (Cont’d)

Figure 180 Figure 181

Recommended Position For Working On A Slope 1

FORWARD

NEUTRAL

REVERSE

NA1450
P-97998

When operating on a slope, level the work area before

beginning [Figure 180]. To brake the machine when going down a slope, move

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

the steering levers (Item 1) [Figure 181] to the
If this is not possible, the following procedures should be NEUTRAL position. This will engage the hydrostatic
used: braking.

Do not work on slopes which are over 15 degrees. When the engine stops on a slope, move the steering
levers to the NEUTRAL position. Lower the boom /
Use a slow work cycle. bucket to the ground.

Avoid working with the tracks across the slope. This will NOTE: If the engine stops, the boom / bucket
reduce stability and increase the tendency for the (attachments) can be lowered to the ground
machine to slide. Position the excavator with the blade using hydraulic pressure which is stored in
downhill and lowered. the accumulator.

Avoid swinging or extending the bucket more than The console must be in the locked down
necessary in a down hill direction. When you must swing position, and the key switch in the ON
the bucket downhill, keep the arm low and skid the bucket position.
downhill.
Use the control lever to lower the boom.
When working with the bucket on the uphill side, keep the
bucket as close to the ground as possible. Dump the spoil Start the engine and resume operation.
far enough away from the trench or hole to prevent the
possibility of a cave in.

OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Operating In Water

Mud and water should be removed from the machine

before parking. In freezing temperatures, park the
machine on boards or concrete to prevent the track or
undercarriage from freezing to the ground and preventing
machine movement.

103 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

103 of 246
Figure 182

Maximum
Water
Level

NA1446

Do not operate or immerse the excavator in water higher

than the bottom of the swing bearing [Figure 182].

Grease the excavator when it has been operated or

immersed in water for a period of time. Greasing forces
the water out of the lubrication areas.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Water must be removed from the cylinder rods. If water
freezes to the cylinder rod, the cylinder seals can be
damaged when the rod is retracted.

104 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

104 of 246
OPERATING PROCEDURE (CONT’D)

Avoiding Track Damage

Mud and water should be removed from the machine Avoid quick turns on bumpy and rocky fields.
before parking. In freezing temperatures, park the
machine on boards or concrete to prevent the track or Driving over sharp objects should be avoided. If this is
undercarriage from freezing to the ground and preventing impossible, do not make turns while driving over sharp
machine movement. objects.

Some Cause Of Track Damage: Figure 185

Figure 183

PI-13035

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Incorrect track tension: When the rubber track is
detracting, the idler or sprocket rides on the projections of
the embedded metal [Figure 183] causing the
embedded metal to be exposed to corrosion. (See
TRACK TENSION on Page 168.)

If rubber track is clogged with stones or foreign objects,

these can get wedged between the sprocket / rollers and
cause detracting and track stress. B-17824

When moisture invades through cuts on the track, the

embedded steel cords will corrode. The deterioration of When rubber tracks drive over sharp projections,
the design strength may lead to the breaking of the steel intensive stress is applied to the lug side rubber surface,
cords. especially at the edges of embedded metals, causing
cracks and cuts in the area around the embedded metals
Figure 184 [Figure 185].
Cuts Avoid extensive stress applied to the lug root where
metals are embedded. Operators should try to avoid
driving over stumps and ridges.

PI-13045

When rubber tracks drive over projections or sharp

objects in the field, the concentrated forces applied cause
cuts on the lug side rubber surface [Figure 184]. In case
of making turns on projections, the lug side rubber
surface will have an even higher chance to be cut. If the
cuts run through the embedded steel cords, it might
result in the steel cords' breakage due to their corrosion.

105 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

105 of 246
DEPTH CHECK

Setup / Calibration

NOTE: The machine shown in the photos may be Figure 186

different than your machine and this manual
but the procedure is the same for all models.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
P113604
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning. Position the excavator [Figure 186] as shown so the
W-2050-0807
second person can install the magnetic tools, the plumb
bob and do measurements for calibrating the system.
NOTE: When the Depth Check kit was initially
installed, the machine should have had the Two magnetic mounted tools are included with the kit for
setup / calibration procedure performed. But positioning the boom, arm and bucket for calibration.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

with usage of any attachment, components These magnetic tools need to be kept with the machine
and the cutting surfaces wear. The accuracy as the Depth Check system should be re-calibrated on a
of the Depth Check system is affected by the yearly basis or sooner if slight changes in accuracy are
noticed.
wear of these components. If loss of accuracy
is noticed, re-calibrate the attachment to reset The Depth Check system sensors are designed for high
the dimensions needed for the Depth Check angle stability and temperature ranges. However, with the
system to operate correctly. use of any mechanical components (boom, arm, bucket,
etc.), there is wear on the components with normal usage
Move the machine to an open area where the boom and and this will affect the accuracy of the Depth Check
arm can be repositioned and there is fresh air as the system over time. Also, if any structural changes are
engine will need to be operating during this procedure. made, components replaced or a new attachment is
installed on the excavator, it will require the setup /
Park the machine on a flat level surface. calibration procedure to be performed.

Figure 187
The calibration procedure is a two person operation. One
person must remain in the cab to enter data into the
deluxe display panel while a second person takes
measurements from outside the machine. Make sure the 1
second person is away from the machine when moving
any of the work group components (boom, arm, bucket,
etc.).

WARNING 2

Keep all bystanders 6 m (20 ft) away from equipment

when operating.
W-2268-0910
P113634

Install one of the magnetic tools (Item 1) on the boom

pivot pin (Item 2) [Figure 187]. Center the magnetic tool
as close as possible to the center of the boom pin.

106 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

106 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 188 Figure 190

2
1

P113635

P113637

Install the second magnetic tool (Item 1) on the arm pivot

pin (Item 2) [Figure 188]. Center the magnetic tool as Measure the distance from the center of the boom
close as possible to the center of the arm pin. magnetic tool (Item 1) [Figure 190] to the ground.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Measure as close to the boom as possible without
Figure 189 interference from components between the boom and the
ground. The closer to the boom the measurement is
taken, the more accurate the measurement should be. (A
2 1 laser level can also be used for locating the centerlines of
the magnetic tools as this will eliminate any possible
variation in the measurements to the ground.)

P113636

Position the excavator with the bucket fully rolled out and
the arm fully extended. Position the workgroup so the
distance from the ground to the two magnetic sensors
(Item 1 and 2) [Figure 189] is identical.

NOTE: It may be necessary on some machines to

lower the blade to raise the front of the
excavator up slightly to position the boom
pivot pin so that the boom and arm pivot
points will be parallel to the ground when
calibrating.

107 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

107 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 191 Figure 192

A B
C P113639

P113638

Scroll through the dash panel by pressing the left arrow

Measure the distance from the center of the arm (Item A) or the right arrow (Item B) until the
magnetic tool (Item 1) [Figure 191] to the ground and [ATTACHMENTS] screen is displayed. Press the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

make sure both measurements are the same. Adjust the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 192]
boom up or down as needed and remeasure until both
dimensions are the same between [Figure 190] and NOTE: If the Depth Check settings have been locked,
[Figure 191]. enter the owner password to access the setup
/ calibration procedure.
Once the dimensions are identical, the second person in
the cab will need to enter the setup / calibration Figure 193
information into the dash panel. (The accuracy of these
dimensions affect the accuracy of the Depth Check.)

NOTE: Make sure there is no cylinder drift that could

affect the calibration accuracy. The second
person needs to enter the information into the 8
display panel in a timely manor. 4 9

C
P113653

On the [ATTACHMENTS] screen, use the left arrow

button (Item 4) or the right arrow button (Item 9) and
scroll to the [ATTACHMENT DEPTH CHECK] screen
shown here. Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) or button
(Item 8) [Figure 193] to access the [DEPTH CHECK
SETUP] screen.

108 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

108 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 194 Figure 196

C C P113640
P113654

Read the message on the screen and press the [ENTER]

One of three different screens can appear. Which ever
button (Item C) [Figure 196] to continue.
screen appears, press button (Item 2) [Figure 194] to
access the [DEPTH CHECK SETUP] screen.
Figure 197
Figure 195

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1

P113642
A
P113641

Press [1. BOOM SETUP] (Item 1) [Figure 197].

NOTE: The units of measure can be set in either
millimeters or inches. Press button (Item 4) to
enter the Preferences screen and select
meters, millimeters, feet or inches, then press
the arrow button (Item A) [Figure 195] to go
back to the above screen.

NOTE: If the Depth Check settings have been locked,

enter the owner password to access the setup
/ calibration procedure.

Press the button (Item 3) [Figure 195] for setup /

calibration mode.

109 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

109 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 198 Figure 200

A C C P113647
P113643

The system needs to know if the machine is equipped

With the boom leveled [Figure 190] and [Figure 191], with a standard arm or the long arm option. The
press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 198] to store excavator ECU knows the machine model so the
this information into the setup / calibration settings. dimensions for the two arms is shown on the screen. For

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

the Standard Arm, press (Item 1), for Long Arm, press
The next setup / calibration step will be for Arm Setup. (Item 2). Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 200]
This will require a plumb bob to make sure the arm is in to store this information into the setup / calibration
the correct vertical position. settings.
NOTE: If a plumb bob is not available, fishing line or
a string with a heavy nut or two tied on one
end of the string can be used in place of a
plumb bob.

Figure 199

P113642

Have the second person in the cab and press the [2.
ARM SETUP] (Item 2) [Figure 199].

110 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

110 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 201 Figure 202

A C P113652

With the arm vertical [Figure 201], press the [ENTER]

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

button (Item C) [Figure 202] to store this information into
the setup / calibration settings.

Figure 203

2
P113646

Place the plumb bob (Item 1) [Figure 201] on the

magnetic tool that is installed on the arm pin. Raise the 3
boom and move the arm until the arm is vertical.

Move the arm until the plumb bob line is centered on the
bucket pivot pin (Item 2) [Figure 201]. (The accuracy of
the arm being vertical affects the accuracy of the Depth
Check.)
P113642

Press the [ATTACHMENT SETUP] button (Item 3)

[Figure 203].

111 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

111 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 204 Figure 206

1 1 1
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4
C 4
5
5 5

P113648 A
C P113678

Select one of the attachments (Item 1 - 5) [Figure 204]

from the list. Use the key pads (Item 1 through 0) and enter a name or
number for the attachment being setup. Press the
NOTE: Up to five different attachments can be [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 206] to save the name.
named, setup / calibrated and stored or (To add the name, press the key pad multiple times until

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

removed to make room for a new attachment. the correct letter or number appears on the screen for the
When switching between attachments, just attachment name.)
select the desired attachment and as long as
it was correctly setup, the Depth Check If setting up additional attachments, select (Items 2
system will have the information needed for through Item 5) [Figure 204] and add the additional
that attachment. attachment names.

Figure 205 If setting up and calibrating multiple attachments at the

same time, add all the attachment names into the system
before doing the measurements. It will be more
1 convenient when it comes time to add the dimensions.

2 Press the arrow button (Item A) [Figure 205] and go

back to the [ATTACHEMENT SETUP] screen.
3 Press the [2. SETUP AND CALIBRATION] button (Item
2) [Figure 205].

A
P113649

On the [ATTACHMENT SETUP] screen, you can select

[1. CHANGE NAME] (Item 1), [2. SETUP AND
CALIBRATION] (Item 2) or [3. REMOVE] (Item 3)
[Figure 205] the attachment from the saved list.

Select [1. CHANGE NAME] (Item 1) [Figure 205] to

open the attachment name screen.

Name Examples: 24” bucket, 30” bucket, Auger, etc.

112 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

112 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 207 This two part step will measure the distance between the
bucket pin (Item 2) [Figure 208] or the furthest point
away from the bucket pin on any attachment used with
the Depth Check system. We will be using a bucket as an
example, but all attachments will be similar for this setup.
(The accuracy of these dimensions affect the accuracy of
the Depth Check.)

Position the bucket vertical. Use the plumb bob to locate

the furtherest vertical cutting point (Item 1) from the
1 center of the bucket pin (Item 2) [Figure 208].

Set the tip of the bucket (Item 1) on the ground ensuring

that everything is still vertical. Using a tape measure,
measure the distance between the cutting edge (Item 1)
and the center of the bucket pin (Item 2) [Figure 208].
C P113651

NOTE: With usage of any attachment, the cutting

The inside length screen [Figure 207] is where the first surfaces wear. Example: The cutting edge
(Item 1) [Figure 208] wears with the use of the
attachment dimensions will be added from the

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

information determined in step [Figure 208]. bucket. The accuracy of the Depth Check
system is affected by the wear of these
Figure 208 components. If loss of accuracy is noticed, re-
calibrate the attachment to reset the
dimensions needed for the Depth Check
5 system to operate correctly.

The [INSIDE LENGTH] screen [Figure 207] is where the

attachment dimensions will be added from the
2
information determined in [Figure 208].
3
Using the key pad (Item 1 through 0) [Figure 207], enter
this dimension. After the measurement is entered and
verified, press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 207].
As soon as the [ENTER] button is pressed, the
[OUTSIDE LENGTH] [Figure 209] screen will be
activated.

1
P113650A

113 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

113 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

Figure 209 Figure 210

C P113669 C P113670

Install a magnetic pin on the second bucket pin (Item 3) Make sure the bucket is still vertical to the bucket pin
[Figure 208]. (Item 2) and the cutting edge (or bucket teeth) (Item 1),

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

and press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 210] to
The next measurement is from the cutting edge (Item 4) store the calibration information.
to the center of the magnetic pin (Item 5) [Figure 208] for
the outside length dimension. NOTE: If more than one attachment is being setup,
the attachments can be changed on the arm
Using the key pad (Item 1 through 0) [Figure 209] enter and the additional attachment dimensions
this dimension. After the measurement is entered and can also be entered. Always measure to the
verified, press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 209]. cutting / work tip on the attachment when
As soon as the [ENTER] button is pressed, the screen measuring the dimensions to add to the
will change to the [ATTACHMENT SETUP] screen inside and outside length screens for each
[Figure 210]. new attachment. The Depth Check system
uses these dimension along with the other
setup points to calculate the tip position for
Depth Check.

NOTE: When using an auger, it will not be as accurate

as solid mounted attachments because all
components are not rigidly mounted (auger
bit has extra movement and rotation where
the system is designed for fixed positions).
When using the auger with the Depth Check
system, enter zero for both attachment
dimensions. When using the auger, try to
keep the X-change horizontal to the ground
during the dig cycle and monitor the screen
depth. Using this setup should give fairly
accurate Depth Check information for auger
applications.

This finishes the SETUP / CALIBRATION procedure

except if also installing a laser. (See If Using A Laser
With Depth Check on Page 115.)

114 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

114 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

If Using A Laser With Depth Check NOTE: For excavator equipped with a clamp, (or
other options or configurations added to the
Figure 211 arm that may interfere with the laser), make
sure there is no hose to laser interference.
LASER CR600 LASER BLR2 Fully curl the arm and bucket and make sure
the hoses do not interfere with the laser
receiver during any arm and bucket
movement. Adjust the position of the laser
1 1 receiver if necessary to avoid any contact
with the hoses.

Figure 212

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

2 2

P113658 1

FOR model E50 with the standard arm ONLY; If using

either of the laser receivers (Item 1) on machines that
have the standard arm and a hydraulic clamp installed,
you will need to check the length of the hydraulic clamp
rod end hose (Item 2) [Figure 211] to make sure the
existing hose does not interfere with the laser.

Measure the length of the hose (Item 2) [Figure 211]. A

Measure the hose from the rod end of the clamp cylinder
(Item 2) [Figure 211] to the end of the hose at the
coupler (Item 4) [Figure 212]

The hose length must be 1245 mm (49.0 in) or a new

hose (P/N 7250478) must be ordered and installed. 3

If the hose is incorrect, it may interfere with the laser P113659A

when the hydraulic clamp is operated and possibly knock
the laser receiver off of the arm. OR, the laser can be For both standard and long arm models; When
mounted on the opposite side of the arm, then the hose installing the laser receiver (Item 1), it should be installed
will not interfere with the laser. as close as possible in line with the arm pin (Item 2) and
the bucket pivot pin (Item 3) [Figure 212].

Position the laser (Item 1) approximately as shown. The

dimension (Item A) will need to be added to the display
screen. Measure from the center of the bucket pin (Item
3) up to the center of the laser receiver (Item 1) [Figure
212]

115 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

115 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Setup / Calibration (Cont’d)

If Using A Laser With Depth Check (Cont’d)

Figure 213 Figure 215

1
6
2
3
4
C 0

P113654
P113671

Initial Setup The [DEPTH CHECK] screen [Figure 215] shows the
following information. Press the numbered key pad to
The initial setup will describe adding and changing the access each screen for setting the system:
Depth Check target settings, grade zone setting, warning

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

zone setting, laser receiver, preferences (changing unit of (1) Re-bench: Used for setting the attachment start point
measurement settings), and describe how the Depth to zero. (Example: Use surveyors elevation pin for the
Check system functions. known depth to set zero.)

NOTE: The laser feature must be activated before you (2) Setup: Opens screen for selecting the following
can enter the laser receiver position into the screens; Set Target Depth, Select Attachment, Setup and
dash panel. See [Figure 227] for turning the Calibration, and Preferences.
laser ON and OFF.
(3) Alarm: Sets the depth alarm to ON or OFF.
Depth Check Settings
(4) Change Screens: Toggles through various depth
Figure 214 screens; Depth Check, distance to target or grade check.

(6) Target Depth: Shows the depths for up to five pre-set

depth settings.

(0) Home Screen: Press 0 to go back to the home

8 screen on the display panel.

C
A B P113653

Using the left / right arrow buttons (Item A and B), toggle
to the Attachment Depth Check screen [Figure 214].

Press the tool button (Item 8) or the [ENTER] button

(Item C) [Figure 214] to go to the [DEPTH CHECK]
screen [Figure 215] and [Figure 216].

116 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

116 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Depth Check Settings (Cont’d)

Figure 216 (C) Distance To Target (Dimension): The distance the

attachment needs to travel to reach the selected target
depth.

A (D) Units: Shows the current selected unit of measure.

B (The units of measure can be set to meters, millimeters,
feet or inches.)
B1
E (E) Name of attachment selected: Shows the name or
C G the number of the selected attachment. (The attachment
must be selected so that the Depth Check system knows
what attachment is currently used for proper depth
F calculations.)
D
A1 (F) Attachment: The screen uses a bucket to represent
the attachment. The bucket will rotate to represent the
position of the bucket (attachment) as the attachment is
P113654
curled out or curled in. When the attachment is

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

calibrated, it sets the position of bucket icon (F).
The [DEPTH CHECK] screen [Figure 216] shows the
following information: (G) Laser: The laser icon (Item G) will show if the laser is
set to ON or OFF. (The laser as shown in [Figure 216]
(A) Target (Dimension): The target is the depth to dig with the circle with the line through it represents the OFF
from an established starting point set by the operator. position.)
(Example: Desired dig depth from a surveyors elevation
pin.)

(A1) Target (Bar Graph): The bar graph line shows

where the target is at in relationship to the attachment
position (Item B1).

(B) Depth (Dimension): This is the current depth of the

attachment cutting edge.

(B1) Depth (Bar Graph): The bar graph line moves up

and down and shows the position of attachment to the
target (Item A1). (When the attachment gets close to the
selected target depth, an audible alarm will start beeping.
The closer the attachment gets to the target, the faster
the beeps. When the alarm is continuous, you have
reached the target depth. The alarm can be set ON or
OFF by pressing the key pad number 3 [Figure 215]).

117 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

117 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Depth Check Settings (Cont’d)

Figure 217 Figure 219

6 1
2

P113641

P113654
Press (Item 1) [Figure 219] to Set Depth Targets.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 220
Press button (Item 6) [Figure 217] to go to the [SELECT
DEPTH TARGET] screen [Figure 218].

Figure 218 1

3
P113673
4
5 Press (Item 1) [Figure 220] to select Depth Target.

Figure 221
A
P113656

1
Five different depths can be pre-set and stored in the
2
system.
3
Select (Item 1 through Item 5) [Figure 218] to select one
of the existing depths. 4

Or, if a different depth is needed, press the return button 5

(Item A) [Figure 218] to go back one screen, then press
button (Item 2) [Figure 217] to go to the [DEPTH P113672
CHECK SETTINGS] screen [Figure 219].
Select (Item 1 through 5) [Figure 221] to select one of
the five possible stored depth settings.

118 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

118 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Depth Check Settings (Cont’d)

Figure 222 Figure 224

2A
2

A C P113655

P113673
Use the key pads (Item 1 through 0) and enter the new
target dimension. If the dimension entered is incorrect,

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

press the arrow button (Item A) [Figure 222] to Press Grade Zone (Item 2) [Figure 224].
backspace the dimension.
Grade zone area (Item 2A) [Figure 224] (in yellow on the
Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 222] to save display screen) is the area that will change with the
the depth dimension. (Dimensions shown in inches but dimensions as set in [Figure 225].
can be set to feet, meters or millimeters. See [Figure
234].) Figure 225

Grade Zone

The Grade Zone sets the distance up or down from the

target depth for when the warning alarm will start to be a
continuous alarm. This will also increase the YELLOW
highlighted area on the screen where the target zone is
shown.

Figure 223

A C
P113674
1

Use the key pads (Item 1 through 0) and enter the new
grade zone dimension. If the dimension entered is
incorrect, press the arrow button (Item A) [Figure 225] to
backspace the dimension.

Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 225] to save

the grade zone dimension. (Dimensions shown in inches
but can be set to feet, meters or millimeters. See [Figure
P113641
234].)

Press [1. SET DEPTH TARGETS] (Item 1) [Figure 223]

to change to the next screen [Figure 224].

119 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

119 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Warning Zone

The Warning Zone sets the upper distance from the Figure 228
target depth when the warning alarm will start to beep.
(The alarm will start beeping when getting close to the
selected target depth. The closer to the target, the faster
beeps until you reach the target depth, then it will be a
continuous sound. If the bucket goes below the selected
target depth, the beeps will be very fast until the bucket is
raised above the target depth.)

Figure 226

1 A C P113675

Use the key pads (Item 1 through 0) and enter the new
warning zone dimension. If the dimension entered is

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

incorrect, press the arrow button (Item A) [Figure 228] to
backspace the dimension.

Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 228] to save

the warning zone dimension. (Dimensions shown in
P113641
inches but can be set to feet, meters or millimeters. See
[Figure 234].)

Press [1. SET DEPTH TARGETS] (Item 1) [Figure 226]

to change to the next screen [Figure 227].

Figure 227

P113673

Press [3. WARNING ZONE] (Item 3) [Figure 227].

Press (Item 6) [Figure 227] to turn the laser ON or OFF.

120 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

120 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D) Figure 231

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Laser Receiver Position On Arm

The Depth Check system needs to know the location of

laser receiver mounted on the arm. This dimension is
used along with the target depth to set the Depth Check
position.

Activate the laser on the dash panel by pressing button

(Item 6) [Figure 230]. Press once, laser ON. Press a
second time, laser OFF. A C
P113671
Figure 229
Use the key pads (Item 1 through 0) and enter the new
laser receive position on the arm dimension. If the
1 dimension entered is incorrect, press the arrow button
(Item A) [Figure 231] to backspace the dimension. See
[Figure 213] for additional information of the laser
receiver.

Press the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 231] to save

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

the warning zone dimension. (Dimensions shown in
inches but can be set to feet, meters or millimeters. See
[Figure 234].)

Measuring The Laser Location

P113641

Figure 232
Press [1. SET DEPTH TARGETS] (Item 1) [Figure 229]
to change to the next screen [Figure 230]. 3
1
Figure 230

6
4

P113673

Press [4. LASER RECEIVER] (Item 4) [Figure 230]. P113679

For the model BLR2 (Item 1), measure to the center of

the knob (Item 2) [Figure 232].

For the model CR600 (Item 3), measure to the center of

the red line (Item 4) [Figure 232].

121 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

121 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d)

Preferences

The Preferences screen is used to set two features; Press the [UNITS] button (Item 2) to toggle between
meters, millimeters, feet or inches. This sets how you will
1. To set the screen preference for; Distance to Target, record and enter ALL dimensions into the Depth Check
Depth Check or Grade Check. system. The selected units will be displayed under the
word [UNITS] (Item 3) [Figure 234] and will be visible on
2. To set units of measure (screen can be set to display; all Depth Check screens that show dimensions.
millimeters, meters, feet or inches).
Figure 235
Figure 233

4
4

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

4A
P113677

P113641

Distance to Target [Figure 235] screen.

Press [4. PREFERENCES] (Item 4) [Figure 233] to
change to the Defaults screen [Figure 234]. Figure 236

Figure 234

2
4

3 4A
P113654

Depth Check [Figure 236] screen.

P113676

Press [DEFAULT SCREEN] button (Item 1) [Figure 234]

to toggle the Preference screen between the following
screens; Distance to Target [Figure 235], Depth Check
[Figure 236] or Grade Check [Figure 237].

122 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

122 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Initial Setup (Cont’d) Operation

Preferences (Cont’d) The following will give some basic operation information
for:
Figure 237

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Check area to be excavated for overhead or
underground lines such as electrical, gas, oil, water,
4 etc. CALL 1-888-258-0808 and consult local utilities
before digging. Extreme caution must be used in
areas where utility lines are present.
4A W-2116-0903
P113657

Grade Check [Figure 237] screen.

NOTE: You can also press button (Item 4) [Figure IMPORTANT

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

235], [Figure 236] or [Figure 237] to toggle
between these three screens any time that the When digging in an area with underground utilities,
icon (Item 4A) is visible on any Depth Check do not depend on the Depth Check system for
screen. digging close to known utilities. The Depth Check
system accuracy is dependent on the accuracy of the
calibration, slope of the ground and other unknown
variables. The current depth of utility lines varies and
may not be to the same depth as when the utility was
buried due to soil erosion, grading and many other
factors. Some laws require non-mechanical (hand)
digging in the area of marked underground utilities.
Make sure you follow all local rules and regulations
regarding digging in the area of underground
utilities.
I-2383-1214

123 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

123 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Operation (Cont’d)

Digging A Hole To A Predetermined Depth (Re-benching Without A Laser Reference)

Figure 238 Figure 240

4
5
1

A P113656
NA1400

Select the target depth by pressing button (Item 1

The first step is to set the position of the bucket (Item 1) through Item 5) [Figure 240] for selecting an existing

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[Figure 238] at the ground surface you are going to start depth. (To add a new target depth or to change an
the dig or on the surveyor mark to establish the starting existing target depth, see information shown with steps
ground position. Lower the bucket until it is on the ground [Figure 217] through [Figure 222].)
or on the surveyor mark. This is called re-benching.
The selected target depth will now appear on the screen
Figure 239 at (Item 6A) [Figure 239].

1 6 NOTE: If the excavator is at an angle (side slope)

1A 6A
when re-benching, the system will only be
accurate on the same plane (location) that it
was re-benched at.

1B

2 2A

P113654

To set the cutting edge position (re-benching) to zero,

access the Depth Check screen, and press the re-
benching button (Item 1). After the button is pressed, the
dimensions on the screen for depth (Item 1A) will be set
to 0.0. (As the bucket is raised or lowered, the screen at
(Item 1A) [Figure 239] will show the bucket position
dimension moving.)

Press button (Item 6) [Figure 239] to change to the

[SELECT DEPTH TARGET] screen [Figure 240].

124 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

124 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Operation (Cont’d)

Digging A Hole To A Predetermined Depth (Re-benching Without A Laser Reference) (Cont’d)

Figure 241 Figure 242

3
1 NA1437 1

As the hole is being dug, the position of the bucket (Item

1) [Figure 241] is dimensionally shown (Item 1A) [Figure 2,5 m DEEP
239] and shown on the bar graph at (Item 1B) [Figure (8.2 ft DEEP)
239]. The distance to target depth is dimensionally 2,0 m DEEP
shown in (Item 2) [Figure 239] and shown on the bar (6.5 ft DEEP)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

2
graph (Item 2A) [Figure 239].
EXC 2
When the bucket is getting close to the target depth, a
warning buzzer (if activated) will start to slowly beep. The
beeps will increase in frequency the closer the bucket If possible, reposition the excavator so the bucket can be
gets to the target depth. When the target depth is re-benched off of the original starting point (Item 1)
reached, the buzzer will sound continuously. [Figure 242].

EXAMPLE: The target depth is 2 meters (6.5 ft) (Item 6A) Or, If that is not possible, position the excavator so the
and the position of the bucket (Item 1A) is at 1.5 meter bucket will reach to the bottom of the hole (Item 2)
(4.9 ft), the distance to target (Item 2) [Figure 239] will be [Figure 242] at an area that is know to be the correct
0.5 m (1.6 ft). [2 m - 1.5 m = 0.5 m (6.5 ft - 4.9 ft = 1.6 ft).] depth. (When re-benched at the bottom of the trench, set
the target depth to zero to continue digging at the original
NOTE: depth.)
The distance from the target depth to when
the when the alarm starts to beep can be set Or, With the bucket on the ground next to the excavator
using the Warning Zone information. (See (Item 3) [Figure 242], re-bench the bucket to zero. Now
Warning Zone on Page 120.). reach into the existing hole until the bucket is touching
the bottom of the hole (Item 2) [Figure 242] in an area
To reposition the excavator to continue digging the hole you know is the correct depth. Example: The dimension
at the original depth; shown in (Item 1A) [Figure 239] is now 2.5 m (8.2 ft). You
now need to reset the target depth to 2.5 m (8.2 ft) to
continue digging the hole at the original target depth.

Or, If you want to just continue digging with the hole

parallel to the ground, no re-benching is necessary but
the hole will not be horizontal, it will be at the same plane
as the ground surface the machine is on.

125 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

125 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Operation (Cont’d)

Digging A Hole To A Predetermined Width And Depth (Re-benching Without A Laser)

EXAMPLE: Digging a 2.0 meter wide x 1.5 meter deep Figure 244
(6.5 ft wide x 3 ft deep) hole.

Figure 243
A

4
2 m WIDE C
1 (6.5 ft WIDE)

P113657

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1,5 m DEEP Press (Item 4) [Figure 244] to scroll to the [GRADE
2,0 m WIDE x 1,5 m DEEP
(3.0 ft DEEP) CHECK] screen on the display panel. For additional
(6.5 ft WIDE x 3.0 ft DEEP)
information. (See Preferences on Page 122.)
EXC 1
The [ZERO] (Item A) is the re-benching starting point.
(Item B) shows the target depth. (Item C) [Figure 244]
Follow the same procedure as for digging a hole except shows the reach (distance away from the zero mark
as follows. (See Digging A Hole To A Predetermined starting point (Item 1) [Figure 243].
Depth (Re-benching Without A Laser Reference) on
Page 124.) NOTE: The warning buzzer (if activated) will start to
beep when getting close to the target depth
When re-benching the bucket for setting to 0.0., position and progressively beeps faster until the target
the bucket (Item 1) [Figure 243] at the starting point of depth is reach and then the buzzer will sound
the side of the hole that the excavator is positioned on. continuously. The buzzer only activates on
the depth, not for the reach (width of hole).
This will allow the Depth Check to know the starting That will need to be monitored visually using
position of the hole for the depth and width of the hole. (Item C) [Figure 244].

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Check area to be excavated for overhead or
underground lines such as electrical, gas, oil, water,
etc. CALL 1-888-258-0808 and consult local utilities
before digging. Extreme caution must be used in
areas where utility lines are present.
W-2116-0903

126 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

126 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Operation (Cont’d)

Digging A Hole Using A Laser

Read and understand the information supplied with the Figure 246
laser for correctly setting up the laser system.
1 2
Figure 245

EXAMPLE: 1 6
A

LASER BEAM

TARGET DEPTH

C P113654A

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

With the laser striking the receiver, press (Item 1)
[Figure 246] to set the laser position.

Press (Item 6) to access the pre-set Target Depth screen

EXC 3
or go to figure [Figure 218] to add or change the target
depth. When the correct target depth is entered, press
the [ENTER] button (Item C) [Figure 246] to save the
NOTE: Make sure the laser receiver dimensional setting.
location on the arm has been added into the
Depth Check. For additional information. (See With the Depth Check system set-up, the excavator can
Laser Receiver Position On Arm on Page 121.) now be repositioned anywhere in the laser range and the
dig depth will stay consistent to the set target depth.
With the arm vertical, raise or lower the boom and arm as
needed until the laser (Item 1) strikes the receiver (Item
2) [Figure 245]. (If needed, curl the bucket fully for
increased bucket ground clearance or a hole may need to
be dug so that the bucket can be lowered to allow the
laser to strike the receiver with the arm vertical.)

NOTE: If the arm is not vertical and you try to re-

bench, a screen will tell you to make the arm
vertical before it will allow the re-bench.

127 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

127 of 246
DEPTH CHECK (CONT’D)

Operation (Cont’d)

Digging A Trench With Slope Using A Laser (Re-benching Using A Laser Reference)

Read and understand the information supplied with the Figure 248
laser for correctly setting up the laser system.
1 2
NOTE: Digging a slope with a laser requires a laser
that has slope capability. The laser must be
positioned square with the desired direction 1 6
of the slope.

Figure 247

LASER BEA
M

1
C P113654
2
TARGET DEP

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

TH
With the laser striking the receiver, press (Item 1)
[Figure 248] to set the laser position.

Press (Item 6) to access the pre-set target depth screen

or go to figure [Figure 218] to add or change the target
depth. When the correct target depth is entered, press
the enter button (Item C) [Figure 248] to save the setting.

EXC 4
With the Depth Check system set-up, the excavator can
now be repositioned anywhere in the laser range and the
dig depth will stay consistent to the set target depth and
NOTE: Make sure the laser receiver dimensional to the slope set with the laser.
location on the arm has been added into the
Depth Check. For additional information. (See
Laser Receiver Position On Arm on Page 121.)

With the arm vertical, raise or lower the boom and arm as
needed until the laser (Item 1) strikes the receiver (Item
2) [Figure 247]. (If needed, curl the bucket fully for
increased bucket ground clearance or a hole may need to
be dug so that the bucket can be lowered to allow the
laser to strike the receiver with the arm vertical.)

NOTE: If the arm is not vertical and you try to re-

bench, a screen will tell you to make the arm
vertical before it will allow the re-bench.

128 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

128 of 246
TOWING THE EXCAVATOR

Procedure

There is not a recommended towing procedure for the

excavators.

• The excavator can be lifted onto the transport vehicle.

• The excavator can be skidded a short distance for

service (EXAMPLE: Move onto a transport vehicle)
without damage to the hydraulic system. (The tracks
will not turn.) There might be slight wear to the tracks
when the excavator is skidded.

• The towing chain (or cable) must be rated at 1.5 times

the weight of the excavator. (See Performance on
Page 236.)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

129 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

129 of 246
LIFTING THE EXCAVATOR

Procedure

Figure 249 Figure 250

1
1

P-97225 P-97107

Fully extend the cylinders of the bucket, arm, and boom Figure 251
so that the excavator is in the position as shown

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[Figure 249].

Raise the blade all the way. 2

Put all the control levers in NEUTRAL.

NOTE: For machines equipped with the angle blade

feature, make sure the blade is in the straight
position prior to lifting.

WARNING
P-92988

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

• Use chains and lifting equipment with sufficient Fasten chains to the ends of the blade (Item 1)
capacity for the weight of the excavator plus any [Figure 249] and [Figure 250] and up to a lifting fixture
added attachments. above the canopy / cab. The lifting fixture must extend
• Maintain center of gravity and balance when over the sides of the canopy / cab to prevent the chains
lifting. from hitting the ROPS / TOPS.
• Do not swing boom or upperstructure. Engage
the upperstructure slew lock. Fasten a chain (Item 2) [Figure 249] and [Figure 251]
• Never lift with operator on machine. from the rod to the lift fixture.
• Never lift with the blade angled (if equipped).
W-2580-0607

130 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

130 of 246
TRANSPORTING THE EXCAVATOR ON A TRAILER Fastening
Loading And Unloading Figure 253

When transporting the machine, observe the rules, motor

vehicle laws, and vehicle limit ordinances. Use a
transport and towing vehicle of adequate length and 1
capacity.

Secure the parking brakes and block the wheels of the

transport vehicle.

Align the ramps with the center of the transport vehicle.

Secure the ramps to the truck bed and be sure ramp
angle does not exceed 15 degrees.
1
Use metal loading ramps with a slip resistant surface.
P-97109
Use ramps that are the correct length and width and can
support the weight of the machine.
Figure 254
The rear of the trailer must be blocked or supported when
loading or unloading the machine to prevent the front of
the transport vehicle from raising.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Determine the direction of the track movement before
moving the machine (blade forward).

Disengage the auto idle feature and move the two-speed

travel to the low range position.

Figure 252 1

P-97226

Fasten chains to the front corners of the blade (Item 1)

[Figure 253] and to the tie down loop at both sides of the
track frame (Item 1) [Figure 254] to prevent it from
moving when going up or down slopes or during sudden
stops.

Use chain binders to tighten the chains and then safely tie
the chain binder levers to prevent loosening.
P-97223A

Move the machine forward onto the transport vehicle

[Figure 252].
WARNING
AVOID SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Do not change direction of the machine while it is on the
ramps. Adequately designed ramps of sufficient strength are
needed to support the weight of the machine when
Lower the boom, arm, bucket, and blade to the transport loading onto a transport vehicle. Wood ramps can
vehicle. break and cause personal injury.
W-2058-0807
Stop the engine and remove the key (if equipped).

Put blocks at the front and rear of the tracks.

131 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

131 of 246
 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

CONTROL CONSOLE LOCKOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

MOTION ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Inspecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Adjusting Switch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Opening And Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Adjusting The Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

RIGHT SIDE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Opening And Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

CAB FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Cleaning And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Cleaning And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Daily Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Replacing The Filter Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Fuel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Biodiesel Blend Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Filling The Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Fuel Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Draining The Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Removing Air From The Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Checking And Adding Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Engine Oil Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

132 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

132 of 246
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Checking Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Removing And Replacing Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fuse And Relay Location / Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Maintaining Battery Charge Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Battery Service During Machine Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Battery Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Removing And Installing The Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Checking And Adding Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Removing And Replacing The Hydraulic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Removing And Replacing The Hydraulic Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

TRACK TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

TRAVEL MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Checking And Adding Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Removing And Replacing Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

ALTERNATOR BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

X-CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

PIN GRABBER QUICK COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

TRACK ROLLER AND IDLER LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

133 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

133 of 246
BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Bucket Teeth Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

CUTTING EDGE (ANGLE BLADE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Removal And Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

LUBRICATION OF THE HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Lubrication Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

EXCAVATOR STORAGE AND RETURN TO SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Return To Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

134 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

134 of 246
 MAINTENANCE SAFETY
Instructions are necessary before operating or servicing machine. Read and
understand the Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s Handbook and
WARNING signs (decals) on machine. Follow warnings and instructions in the manuals
when making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for correct function after
adjustments, repairs or service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death. W-2003-0807

Safety Alert Symbol: This symbol with a warning statement, means: “Warning, be alert! Your safety is
involved!” Carefully read the message that follows.

CORRECT CORRECT CORRECT

P-90216 NA1428 NA1425

Never service the Bobcat Compact Use the correct procedure to lift Cleaning and maintenance are
Excavator without instructions. and support the excavator. required daily.
WRONG WRONG WRONG

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NA1427 NA1426 NA1429
Have good ventilation when Vent exhaust to outside when Always lower the bucket and
welding or grinding painted parts. engine must be run for service. blade to the ground before doing
Wear dust mask when grinding Exhaust system must be tightly any maintenance.
painted parts. Toxic dust and gas sealed. Exhaust fumes can kill Never modify equipment or add
can be produced. without warning. attachments not approved by
Bobcat Company.

WRONG WRONG WRONG

NA1430 NA1431 B-19798

Stop, cool and clean engine of Keep body, jewelry and clothing Lead-acid batteries produce
flammable materials before away from moving parts, electrical flammable and explosive gases.
checking fluids. contact, hot parts and exhaust. Keep arcs, sparks, flames and
Never service or adjust machine Wear eye protection to guard from lighted tobacco away from
with the engine running unless battery acid, compressed springs, batteries.
instructed to do so in the fluids under pressure and flying Batteries contain acid which
manual. debris when engines are running burns eyes or skin on contact.
Avoid contact with leaking or tools are used. Use eye Wear protective clothing. If acid
hydraulic fluid or diesel fuel protections approved for type of contacts body, flush well with
under pressure. It can penetrate welding. water. For eye contact flush well
the skin or eyes. Keep tailgate closed except for and get immediate medical
Never fill fuel tank with engine service. Close and latch tailgate attention.
running, while smoking, or when before operating the excavator.
near open flame.
Maintenance procedures which are given in the Operation & Maintenance Manual can be performed by the owner/
operator without any specific technical training. Maintenance procedures which are not in the Operation & Maintenance
Manual must be performed ONLY BY QUALIFIED BOBCAT SERVICE PERSONNEL. Always use genuine Bobcat
replacement parts. The Service Safety Training Course is available from your Bobcat dealer.
MSW38-0409

135 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

135 of 246
SERVICE SCHEDULE

Maintenance Intervals

Maintenance work must be done at regular intervals.

Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and early
failures. WARNING
The service schedule is a guide for correct maintenance
of the Bobcat excavator. AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Instructions are necessary before operating or
servicing machine. Read and understand the
Operation & Maintenance Manual, Operator’s
Handbook and signs (decals) on machine. Follow
warnings and instructions in the manuals when
making repairs, adjustments or servicing. Check for
correct function after adjustments, repairs or
service. Untrained operators and failure to follow
instructions can cause injury or death.
W-2003-0807

Every 10 Hours (Before Starting The Excavator)

• Engine Oil - Check level and add as needed. (See Page 152.)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• Engine Air Filters and Air System - Check display panel. Service only when required. Check for leaks and damaged
components. (See Page 146.)
• Engine Cooling System - Check coolant level COLD and add premixed coolant as needed. (See Page 155.)
• Hydraulic Fluid - Check fluid level and add as needed. (See Page 163.)
• Fuel Filter - Drain water and sediment from filter. (See Page 150.)
• Seat Belt, Seat Belt Retractors, Seat Belt Mounting hardware, Control Console Lockout - Check the condition
of seat belt and mounting hardware. Clean or replace seat belt retractors as needed. Check the control console
lockout lever for proper operation. Clean dirt and debris from moving parts.
• Motion Alarm - Check for proper function. (See Page 140.)
• Operator Canopy / Cab - Check the canopy / cab condition and mounting hardware.
• Operator Cab and HVAC Filters - Clean filters as needed. (See Page 144.)
• Indicators and Lights - Check for correct operation of all indicators and lights.
• Safety Signs - Check for damaged signs (decals). Replace any signs that are damaged. (See Page 16.)
• Track Tension - Check tension and adjust as needed. (See Page 168.)
• Pivot Points - Grease all machinery pivot points. Grease clamp and angle blade (if equipped). (See Page 178.)
• X-Change / Attachment Coupler - Check for damage or loose parts (if equipped). (See Page 175.)

First 50 Hours

• Engine Oil and Filter - Replace oil and filter. (See Page 152.)
• Drive Belts (Alternator) (Air Conditioning - If Equipped) - Check condition. Replace as needed. (See Page 172.)
• Alternator and Starter - Check connections.
• Fuel Filter – Replace filter element. (See Page 150.)
• Travel Motors (Final Drive) - Replace fluid. (See Page 171.)
• Hydraulic Filter, and Case Drain Filter - Replace the hydraulic filter and case drain filter. (See Page 166.)

Every 50 Hours

• Swing Bearing - Grease swing bearing and swing pinion. Service every 10 hours when operating in water. (See Page
178.)
• Battery - Check cables, and connections. (See Page 162.)
• Fuel Tank - Drain water and sediment from fuel tank and fuel filter. (See Page 150.)

SS EXC E32 - E55 iT4 T4-K-0418

136 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

136 of 246
SERVICE SCHEDULE (CONT’D)

Maintenance Intervals (Cont’d)

Every 100 Hours

• Spark Arrestor Muffler (If Equipped) - Clean spark chamber. (See Page 167.)

Every 250 Hours Or Every 12 Months

• Travel Motors (Final Drive) - Check fluid level and add as needed. (See Page 171.)

Every 500 Hours Or Every 12 Months

• Engine Oil and Filter - Replace oil and filter. (See Page 152.)
• Cooling System - Clean debris from radiator, fuel cooler, hydraulic fluid cooler, air conditioning condenser (if
equipped). (See Page 155.)
• Hydraulic Filter, Case Drain Filter and Hydraulic Reservoir Breather Cap - Replace the hydraulic filter, case drain
filter and the reservoir breather cap. (See Page 166.)
• Drive Belts (Alternator) (Air Conditioning - If Equipped) - Check condition. Replace as needed. (See Page 172.)
• Alternator and Starter - Check connections. (See Page 172.)
• HVAC - Clean housing and coils. (See Page 154.)

Every 1000 Hours Or Every 12 Months

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• Swing Cylinder Base End - Grease swing cylinder base end grease fitting. (See Page 178.)
• Hydraulic Fluid and Filters - Replace hydraulic fluid and filters. (See Page 166.)
• Travel Motors (Final Drive) - Replace fluid. (See Page 171.)
• Engine Valves - Adjust the engine valve clearance.

Every 24 Months

• Coolant - Replace the coolant. (See Page 166.)

SS EXC E32 - E55 iT4 T4-K-0418

137 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

137 of 246
CONTROL CONSOLE LOCKOUTS

Inspection And Maintenance

Figure 255

P113091

When the left console is raised [Figure 255], the

hydraulic control levers (joysticks) and traction system

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

must not function.

Sit in the operator's seat, fasten the seat belt and start
the engine.

Raise the left console [Figure 255].

Move the joystick control levers. There should be no

movement of the boom, arm, slew or bucket.

Move the steering control levers. There should be no

movement of the excavator tracks.

Service the system if these controls do not deactivate

when the left control console is raised. (See your Bobcat
dealer for service.)

138 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

138 of 246
SEAT BELT

Inspection And Maintenance

Figure 256

WARNING 1

Failure to properly inspect and maintain the seat belt

can cause lack of operator restraint resulting in 3
serious injury or death.
W-2466-0703

Check the seat belt daily for correct function.

Inspect the seat belt system thoroughly at least once

each year or more often if the machine is exposed to
severe environmental conditions or applications. 2 4

Any seat belt system that shows cuts, fraying, extreme or

unusual wear, significant discolorations due to ultraviolet
UV exposure, dusty / dirty conditions, abrasion to the
seat belt webbing, or damage to the buckle, latch plate,

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

retractor (if equipped), hardware or any other obvious
problem should be replaced immediately.

The items below are referenced in [Figure 256].

1. Check the webbing. If the system is equipped with a

B-22283
retractor, pull the webbing completely out and inspect
the full length of the webbing. Look for cuts, wear,
fraying, dirt and stiffness.

2. Check the buckle and latch for correct operation.

Make sure latch plate is not excessively worn,
deformed or buckle is not damaged or casing broken.

3. Check the retractor web storage device (if equipped)

by extending webbing to determine if it looks correct
and that it spools out and retracts webbing correctly.

4. Check webbing in areas exposed to ultraviolet (UV)

rays from the sun or extreme dust or dirt. If the original
color of the webbing in these areas is extremely faded
and / or the webbing is packed with dirt, the webbing
strength may have deteriorated.

See your Bobcat dealer for seat belt system replacement

parts for your machine.

139 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

139 of 246
MOTION ALARM SYSTEM

Description WARNING
This excavator may be equipped with a motion alarm
system. The motion alarm will sound when the operator AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
moves the travel control levers in either the forward or When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
reverse direction. Slight movement of the steering levers air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
in either the forward or reverse direction is required with fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
hydraulic components before the motion alarm will outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
sound. gases which can kill without warning.
W-2050-0807
Inspecting
Sit in the operator’s seat and fasten the seat belt. Start
Figure 257
the engine. (See PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE on
Page 61.)
1
Move the travel control levers (one lever at a time) in the
forward direction. The motion alarm must sound. Move
the travel control levers (one lever at a time) in the
reverse direction. The motion alarm must sound.

Figure 259

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113019

Figure 258 1

P113019

1
Slightly move both travel control levers in the forward
direction (until the machine is slowly moving forward) and
then press the motion alarm cancel switch (Item 1)
[Figure 259]. The motion alarm will shut off. With the
machine still moving forward, move one of the levers to
P-92947
the NEUTRAL position, the motion alarm must sound.

Inspect for damaged or missing motion alarm decal (Item Slightly move both travel control levers in the reverse
1) [Figure 257] (cab machine) or (Item 1) [Figure 258] direction (until the machine is slowly moving backward)
(canopy machine). Replace if required. and then press the motion alarm cancel switch (Item 1)
[Figure 259] (the switch icon will be illuminated when the
NOTE: The excavator will need to be moved slightly motion alarm is deactivated). The motion alarm will shut
in both the forward and reverse direction to off. With the machine still moving backward, move one of
test the motion alarm. Keep all bystanders the levers to the NEUTRAL position, the motion alarm
away from machine during test. must sound.

Return both levers to NEUTRAL and turn excavator key

to OFF position. Exit the excavator. (See STOPPING
THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE EXCAVATOR on
Page 69.)

140 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

140 of 246
MOTION ALARM SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Inspecting (Cont’d) Adjusting Switch Position

The motion alarm is mounted to the bottom rear of the Figure 261
excavator. (To the front of the engine oil pan.) Switch Location

Figure 260

1
1

P-92962

The motion alarm switch (Item 2) [Figure 261] is located

P-92963 in the travel control valve located under the floorplate.
Remove the floor mat and the floorplate to access the
Inspect the motion alarm electrical connections and wire switch.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

harness (Item 1) [Figure 260], wire harness (Item 1)
[Figure 261] and motion alarm switch (Item 2) The switch (Item 2) [Figure 261] is non-adjustable. It
[Figure 261] for tightness and damage. Repair or must be fully installed into the travel control valve
replace any damaged components. housings and tightened. Tighten the switch to 18 - 20
N•m (13 - 15 ft-lb).
If the motion alarm switch requires service, see the
following information. Inspect the motion alarm system for proper function after
switch replacement.

WARNING
This machine is equipped with a motion alarm.
ALARM MUST SOUND!
when operating forward or backward.

Failure to maintain a clear view in the direction of

travel could result in serious injury or death.

The operator is responsible for the safe operation of

this machine.
W-2786-0309

141 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

141 of 246
TAILGATE

Opening And Closing Adjusting The Latch

Figure 263

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Never service or adjust the machine when the engine
is running unless instructed to do so in the manual.
W-2012-0497

1
WARNING
Keep the rear door closed when operating the P-97227
machine. Failure to do so could seriously injure a
bystander.
W-2020-1285 The tailgate latch (Item 1) [Figure 263] can be adjusted
by loosening the two bolts, moving the latch, and

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

tightening the two bolts.
Figure 262
Close the tailgate before operating the excavator.

P-97103

Pull the latch (Item 1) [Figure 262] and open the tailgate.

Push firmly to close the tailgate.

NOTE: The tailgate can be locked using the start key.

142 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

142 of 246
RIGHT SIDE COVER

Opening And Closing

Figure 264

P-97112

Open the tailgate to access the right side cover latch

(Item 1) [Figure 264].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Pull the latch handle (Item 1) [Figure 264] out until the
right side cover is unlatched.

Figure 265

P113096

Raise the right side cover and rotate forward until it is

held open by the retainer (Item 1) [Figure 265].

To close the right side cover, lift up on the retainer (Item

1) [Figure 265] while raising the right side cover. Rotate
the cover back until it is in the fully closed position.
Secure the right side cover with the latch (Item 1)
[Figure 264].

143 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

143 of 246
CAB FILTERS Fresh Air Filter

Cleaning And Maintenance Figure 268

The recirculation filter and the fresh air filter must be

cleaned regularly. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page
136.)
1
Recirculation Filter
2
Figure 266

1
P113022

The fresh air filter is located under the right side cover.

Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on

Page 143.)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P113020
Pull out on the tab (Item 1) and remove the cover (Item 2)
[Figure 268].

The recirculation filter (Item 1) [Figure 266] is located to Figure 269

the right of the operator’s seat.

Figure 267

1 1

P113023

P113021

Pull the filter (Item 1) [Figure 269] out of the housing.

Pull up on the filter (Item 1) [Figure 267] until removed
from the housing. Shake the filter or use low pressure air to clean the filter.
Do not use solvents. Replace the filter when very dirty or
Shake the filter or use low pressure air to clean the filter. damaged.
Replace the filter when very dirty or if damaged.
Installation: Position the filter (Item 1) [Figure 267] into
Installation: Position the bottom of the filter (Item 1) the housing and slowly push the filter in fully.
[Figure 267] into the housing and slowly push the filter
down fully. Place the bottom tabs of the filter cover (Item 2) into the
frame and push the top in until the tab (Item 1)
[Figure 268] locks to the frame.

144 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

144 of 246
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

Cleaning And Maintenance

The inside of the HVAC housing needs to be cleaned After the housing has been cleaned and flushed, remove
regularly. Dust will accumulate over time inside the the jackstands and raise the blade so the front of the
housing. A dusty heater and evaporator coil will reduce excavator is flat on the ground. Stop the engine.
heating and cooling efficiency. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 136.) There are three rubber drain valves that allow
condensation to drain from the housing during normal air
The HVAC housing is located to the right of the operator conditioning usage. These drain valve can get clogged
seat. with dirt and should be cleaned at the same time the
housing is cleaned.
Figure 270
Two of the drain valve can be accessed from the right
1 side cover (the drain valves are located below the HVAC
housing on the right side) and one of the valves is located
below the left rear corner of the HVAC housing and will
1
be accessed by removing the center floorplate.

Pinch the three rubber drain valves on the flat sides to

open the valves and allow dirt and moisture to exit from
the end of the valves.

Reinstall the center floorplate and close the right side

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

cover.

Figure 272

P113084 1

1 1
Remove the floor mat.

Pull back on the two latches (Item 1) [Figure 270] and

remove the HVAC side cover. 2

To allow water to drain from the HVAC housing during the

cleaning process, it is recommended to rotate the 2
upperstructure 90° to the right. Then using the blade,
raise the front of the excavator to allow water to run out of 2
the housing. Use jackstands to support the front of the
undercarriage.
P113083A
Figure 271

NOTE: The floor mat needs to be removed to allow

1 easier access for installing the HVAC side
cover.

Three tabs (Item 1) are on the bottom of the HVAC

housing that the side cover retainers (Item 2)
[Figure 272] fit into.

Position the side cover on the tabs and starting with the
front edge of the side cover, position it into the front of the
P113083
HVAC housing. Press on the front of the cover to secure
the front latch (Item 1) [Figure 270]. Then press in on the
top edge of the side cover and work back to the rear of
Use a lower pressure air or a low pressure water stream
the cover and secure the rear latch.
to remove debris and to clean the coils (Item 1)
[Figure 271]. Reinstall the floor mat.

145 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

145 of 246
AIR CLEANER SERVICE Figure 275

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.) 1

Daily Check

The air cleaner is located in the engine compartment.

Open the tailgate to access the air cleaner for service.
(See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Figure 273

P-97229
2
Pull the outer filter (Item 1) [Figure 275] from the air
cleaner housing.

Check the housing for damage.

Clean the housing and the seal surface. DO NOT use

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-97116 compressed air.

Install a new filter.

Check the condition indicator (Item 1) [Figure 273]. If the
red ring shows in the condition indicator, the filter needs Figure 276
to be replaced.

Replace the inner filter every third time the outer filter is 2
replaced or as indicated.

Replacing The Filter Elements

Outer Filter

Figure 274 2

2
1
1
P-97228

Install the dust cup (Item 1) and engage the three

fasteners (Item 2) [Figure 276].
1
Check the air intake hose and the air cleaner housing for
1 damage. Make sure all connections are tight.

2 After the outer filter has been replaced, press the button
P-97228 (Item 1) [Figure 273] on the end of the condition
indicator and start the engine. Run at full rpm, then
reduce engine speed and stop the engine. If the red ring
Release the three fasteners (Item 1) [Figure 274]. (Item 2) [Figure 273] shows in the condition indicator,
replace the inner filter.
Remove and clean the dust cup (Item 2) [Figure 274].

146 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

146 of 246
AIR CLEANER SERVICE (CONT’D)

Replacing The Filter Elements (Cont’d)

Inner Filter

Only replace the inner filter under the following

conditions:

• Replace the inner filter every third time the outer filter
is replaced.

• After the outer filter has been replaced, press the

button (Item 2) [Figure 273] on the end of the
condition indicator. Start the engine. Run the engine
at full rpm, then reduce engine speed. Stop the
engine. If the red ring shows in the condition indicator,
replace the inner filter.

Figure 277

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1

P-97230

Remove the dust cup, outer filter and inner filter (Item 1)
[Figure 277].

NOTE: Make sure all sealing surfaces are free of dirt

and debris.

Install the new inner filter.

Install the outer filter and the dust cup.

Press the button on the condition indicator to remove the

red ring.

Close the tailgate.

147 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

147 of 246
FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel Specifications

NOTE: Contact your local fuel supplier to receive Biodiesel Blend Fuel
recommendations for your region.
Biodiesel blend fuel has unique qualities that should be
At a minimum, low sulfur diesel fuel must be used in this considered before using in this machine:
machine. Low sulfur is defined as 500 mg/kg (500 ppm)
sulfur maximum.
• Cold weather conditions can lead to plugged fuel
system components and hard starting.
Ultra low sulfur diesel fuel may also be used in this
machine. Ultra low sulfur is defined as 15 mg/kg (15 ppm)
sulfur maximum. • Biodiesel blend fuel is an excellent medium for
microbial growth and contamination which can cause
U.S. Standard (ASTM D975) corrosion and plugging of fuel system components.

Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel, Grade Number • Use of biodiesel blend fuel may result in premature
2-D or Grade Number 1-D. failure of fuel system components, such as plugged
fuel filters and deteriorated fuel lines.
The following is one suggested blending guideline that
should prevent fuel gelling during cold temperatures:
• Shorter maintenance intervals may be required, such
as cleaning the fuel system and replacing fuel filters
TEMPERATURE GRADE 2-D GRADE 1-D and fuel lines.
Above -9°C (+15°F) 100% 0%

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• Using biodiesel blended fuels containing more than
Down to -21°C (-5°F) 50% 50% five percent biodiesel can affect engine life and cause
Below -21°C (-5°F) 0% 100% deterioration of hoses, tubelines, injectors, injector
pump and seals.
NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel may also be used in this
machine. Biodiesel blend fuel must contain Apply the following guidelines if biodiesel blend fuel is
no more than five percent biodiesel mixed used:
with ultra low sulfur petroleum based diesel.
This biodiesel blend fuel is commonly • Ensure the fuel tank is as full as possible at all times
marketed as B5 blended diesel fuel. B5
to prevent moisture from collecting in the fuel tank.
blended diesel fuel must meet ASTM
specifications.
• Ensure that the fuel tank cap is securely tightened.
E.U. Standard (EN590)
• Biodiesel blend fuel can damage painted surfaces,
Use only clean, high quality diesel fuel that meets the remove all spilled fuel from painted surfaces
specifications listed below: immediately.

• Low sulfur diesel fuel defined as 500 mg/kg (500 ppm) • Drain all water from the fuel filter daily before
sulfur maximum operating the machine.
• Diesel fuel with cetane number of 51.0 and above.
• Do not exceed engine oil change interval. Extended
Clean, high quality diesel fuel that meets the EN590 oil change intervals can cause engine damage.
specification may also be used.
• Before vehicle storage; drain the fuel tank, refill with
NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel may also be used in this 100% petroleum diesel fuel, add fuel stabilizer and
machine. Biodiesel blend fuel must contain run the engine for at least 30 minutes.
no more than seven percent biodiesel mixed
with ultra low sulfur petroleum based diesel. NOTE: Biodiesel blend fuel does not have long term
This biodiesel blend fuel is commonly stability and should not be stored for more
marketed as B7 blended diesel fuel. B7 than three months.
blended diesel fuel must meet EN590
specifications.

148 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

148 of 246
FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Filling The Fuel Tank

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the service interval

when to remove water from or replace the fuel filter. (See
WARNING SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

Stop and cool the engine before adding fuel. NO
SMOKING! Failure to obey warnings can cause an
explosion or fire.
W-2063-0807

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

Figure 278

P-97120

The fuel cap uses the start key to unlock the fuel cap.

Remove the fuel fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 278].

Use a clean, approved safety container to add fuel. Add

fuel only in an area that has a free movement of air and
no flames or sparks. NO SMOKING!

Install and tighten the fuel fill cap.

Clean up any spilled fuel.

149 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

149 of 246
FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Fuel Filters Draining The Fuel Tank

Removing Water See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service
interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)
Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)
Figure 280
Figure 279

1 P-97232

P-97231

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 281
Loosen the drain (Item 1) [Figure 279] at the bottom of
the filter to drain water from the filter into a container.

Clean up any spilled fuel.

Replacing Elements
1
Remove the filter (Item 2) [Figure 279].

Clean the area around the filter housing. Put clean oil on
the seal of the new filter. Install the fuel filter and hand
tighten.
P-97227
Remove the air from the fuel system. (See Removing Air
From The Fuel System on Page 151.)
Remove the hose (Item 1) [Figure 280] from the fuel
filter. Route the hose to a container.

WARNING Squeeze the hand pump (priming bulb) (Item 1)

[Figure 281] to start the fuel siphoning from the fuel tank.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can Drain the fuel into the container.
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible. Reuse, recycle or dispose of fuel in an environmentally
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do safe manner.
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention Reinstall the hose (Item 1) [Figure 280] after the fuel is
from a physician familiar with this injury. removed from fuel tank.
W-2072-0807

150 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

150 of 246
FUEL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing Air From The Fuel System

After replacing the fuel filter or when the fuel tank has run
out of fuel, air must be removed from the fuel system
before starting the engine. WARNING
Figure 282
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
1 not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention
from a physician familiar with this injury.
W-2072-0807

P-97232

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 283

P-97227

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Open the fuel filter vent (Item 1) [Figure 282] and

operate the hand pump (priming bulb) (Item 1)
[Figure 283] until the fuel flows from the vent with no air
bubbles.

Close the vent (Item 1) [Figure 282].

Clean up any spilled fuel.

Start the engine. It may be necessary to open the vent

(Item 2) [Figure 283] (at the fuel injection pump) briefly
until the engine runs smoothly.

151 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

151 of 246
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Checking And Adding Engine Oil Engine Oil Chart

Check the engine oil after every 8 - 10 hours of operation Figure 285
and before starting the engine. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 136.) ENGINE OIL
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
Figure 284 (LUBRICATION OILS FOR DIESEL ENGINE
CRANKCASE)

TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED BEFORE

1
NEXT OIL CHANGE (DIESEL ENGINES MUST USE
API CLASSIFICATION CJ-4 OR BETTER, OR ACEA
E9 OR BETTER)
P-97233

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[1] Bobcat Synthetic Oil – 5W-40

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Bobcat engine oils are recommended for use in this
Remove the dipstick (Item 1) [Figure 284]. machine. If Bobcat engine oil is not available, use a good
quality engine oil that meets API Service Classification of
Keep the oil level between the marks on the dipstick. CJ-4 or better, or ACEA E9 or better [Figure 285].

Use a good quality motor oil that meets the correct API
Service Classification.
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

152 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

152 of 246
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 288

Removing And Replacing Oil And Filter

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the service interval for

replacing the engine oil and filter. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop

the engine.

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Figure 286
1
P-97234

2 Remove the oil filter (Item 1) [Figure 288] and clean the
filter housing surface.

Use a genuine Bobcat replacement filter. Put clean oil on

the filter gasket. Install the filter and hand tighten.

Install and tighten the drain plug (Item 1) [Figure 287].

1
Put the drain hose (Item 1) back into the storage clamp

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

(Item 2) [Figure 286].

Figure 289
P-97123

If equipped with the optional air deflector, remove the four

bolts and the air deflector to access the drain hose (Item
1) [Figure 286].

Remove the drain hose (Item 1) from the storage clamp

(Item 2) [Figure 286].

Figure 287

P-97235

Remove the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 289].

Put oil in the engine. (See ENGINE LUBRICATION

SYSTEM on Page 152.) and (See Capacities on Page
240.)
1
Install the fill cap (Item 1) [Figure 289].

P-97157 Start the engine and let it run for several minutes.

Place a container under the excavator. Remove the drain Stop the engine. Check for leaks at the oil drain plug and
plug (Item 1) [Figure 287] from the drain hose. the oil filter. Check the oil level.

Recycle or dispose of used oil in an environmentally safe Add oil as needed if it is not at the top mark on the
manner. dipstick.

153 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

153 of 246
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Check the cooling system every day to prevent over-heating, loss of performance or engine damage. (See SERVICE
SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

Cleaning

Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on Figure 292
Page 143.)

NOTE: Allow the cooling system and engine to cool

before servicing or cleaning the cooling
system.

Figure 290

1 1
2 3

P-97127

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Use air pressure or water pressure to clean the radiator
(Item 1), oil cooler (Item 2) and condenser (Item 3)
[Figure 292] (if equipped). Be careful not to damage fins
when cleaning.
P-97126
Position the knob (Item 1) so it fits into the radiator mount
(Item 3) and the condenser mount (Item 2) [Figure 291]
Loosen the knob (Item 1) [Figure 290]. Slide the knob (if equipped).
toward the rear of the machine.
Slide the knob (Item 1) [Figure 290] toward the front of
Figure 291 the machine until it is fully seated in the slots of the
mounting brackets. Tighten the knob (Item 1)
1 [Figure 290]. Be careful not to damage fins.
3

P-97127

Slide the knob (Item 1) out of the condenser mount (Item

2) (if equipped) and the radiator mounting bracket (Item
3) [Figure 291]. Be careful not to damage fins.

154 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

154 of 246
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Checking Level

WARNING IMPORTANT
AVOID BURNS AVOID ENGINE DAMAGE
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot. Always use the correct ratio of water to antifreeze.
You can be seriously burned.
W-2070-1203 Too much antifreeze reduces cooling system
efficiency and may cause serious premature engine
damage.

Too little antifreeze reduces the additives which

WARNING protect the internal engine components; reduces the
boiling point and freeze protection of the system.
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any Always add a premixed solution. Adding full strength
of the following conditions exist: concentrated coolant can cause serious premature
• When fluids are under pressure. engine damage.
I-2124-0497
• Flying debris or loose material is present.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2019-0907

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Figure 293

P-97236

Check the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank (Item

1) [Figure 293].

The coolant level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks on the coolant recovery tank when the engine is
cold.

NOTE: The cooling system is factory filled with

propylene glycol (purple color). DO NOT mix
propylene glycol with ethylene glycol.

155 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

155 of 246
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing And Replacing Coolant Figure 296

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for correct service

intervals. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

Stop the engine. Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on

Page 142.)

WARNING 1

AVOID BURNS
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot.
You can be seriously burned.
W-2070-1203
P-97130

Figure 294
Put a hose on the drain valve on the engine block. Open
the drain valve (Item 1) [Figure 296] and drain the
coolant into a container.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

After all the coolant is removed, close both drain valves.
1
Recycle or dispose of the used coolant in an
environmentally safe manner.

Mix the coolant in a separate container. (See ENGINE

COOLING SYSTEM on Page 154.) and (See Capacities
on Page 240.)
P-97128
NOTE: The cooling system is factory filled with
propylene glycol (purple color). DO NOT mix
When the engine is cool, loosen and remove the radiator propylene glycol with ethylene glycol.
cap (Item 1) [Figure 294].
The correct mixture of coolant to provide a -37°C (-34°F)
Figure 295 freeze protection is 5 L propylene glycol mixed with 4,4 L
of water OR 1 U.S. gal propylene glycol mixed with 3.5 qt
of water.

Add premixed coolant; 47% water and 53% propylene

glycol to the recovery tank if the coolant level is low.

Use a refractometer to check the condition of propylene

glycol in your cooling system.

Add premixed coolant until the level is correct.

1 Run the engine until it is at operating temperature. Stop

the engine. Check the coolant level and add as needed.
Be sure the radiator cap is tight.
P-97129
Add coolant to the recovery tank as needed.

Put a hose on the drain valve at the bottom of the Close the tailgate.
radiator. Open the drain valve (Item 1) [Figure 295] and
drain the coolant into a container.

156 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

156 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Description Fuse And Relay Location / Identification

Figure 297 A decal is inside the fuse cover to show location and amp
ratings.

1 Remove the cover to check or replace the fuses and

relays.

The location and sizes are shown in [Figure 298].

Always replace fuses using the same type and capacity.

P-97131

The excavator has a 12 volt, negative ground electrical

system. The electrical system is protected by fuses (Item

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1) [Figure 297] located under the right side cover of the
excavator. The fuses will protect the electrical system
when there is an electrical overload. The reason for the
overload must be found and corrected before starting the
engine again.

The battery cables must be clean and tight. Check the

electrolyte level in the battery. Add distilled water as
needed. Remove acid or corrosion from the battery and
cables with a sodium bicarbonate and water solution.

Put Battery Saver P/N 6664458 or grease on the battery

terminals and cable ends to prevent corrosion.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.

If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities

of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807

157 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

157 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Fuse And Relay Location / Identification (Cont’d)

Figure 298

F5 F1 F9
A C E G
F6 F2 F10

F7 F3 F11
B D F H
F8 F4 F12

The location and sizes are shown in the table below and on the decal [Figure 298]. Relays are identified by the letter “R”
in the AMP column.

REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP REF ICON DESCRIPTION AMP

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

F1 Wiper / Washer 10 F9 Controller 25 A Switched Power R

F2 Switched Power 20 F10 ACD 25 B Fuel Shutoff R

F3 Alternator 25 F11 Lights 20 C HVAC R

Excite / Heater

F4 ACD 25 F12 Power Port 15 D Lights R

F5 Controller 20 E NOT USED R

F6 HVAC 35 F Glow Plugs R

F7 Start Key 5 G NOT USED R

F8 Fuel Pull 25 H Starter R

158 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

158 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Battery Maintenance

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

The Bobcat brand battery supplied with your machine is

WARNING
sealed and does not require watering. Proper charging
and storage are important to maximize the life of all AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
batteries. Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
Figure 299 rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.

If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities

of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Maintaining Battery Charge Level
P127797A P100960
All batteries will self-discharge over time. This machine
has features that require battery power even when the
Simple steps for reliability and long battery life: machine is not being used. Use of a quality battery
maintainer is highly recommended to ensure that your
• Keep battery posts and terminals clean [Figure 299]. machine is ready to start when you need it and avoid
costly battery replacement.
• Keep terminals tight.
Battery Maintainers
• Remove corrosion from battery and terminals with
sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and water solution. Use a good quality battery maintainer to keep the battery
above 12.4 volts for machines that are not frequently
• Put Bobcat Battery Saver or grease on the battery used. Batteries below 12.4 volts must first be charged
terminals and cable ends to prevent corrosion. using a battery charger. Solar maintainers should have a
minimum capacity of 10 watts to be effective.
• Operate the machine for at least 15 minutes to
recover from the battery drain caused by engine start
up whenever practical.
Battery Service During Machine Storage
• Maintain the battery charge level. This is a key factor
for long battery life. Remove the battery if storing the machine for an
extended period of time. Fully charge the battery. Store
• Charge a severely discharged battery with a battery the battery in a cool dry place above freezing and boost
charger instead of relying on the machine charging charge periodically. If battery removal is not desired, a
system. (See Battery Charging on Page 160.) good quality battery maintainer must be used to
compensate for battery self-discharge and parasitic loads
• Check the battery state of charge every 30 days on from machine controllers, accessories, and features such
machines that are not frequently used. (See Battery as connected machine intelligence.
Testing on Page 160.)

159 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

159 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Battery Testing Battery Charging

Figure 300 A battery charger designed for 12 volt charging systems

is recommended. Follow the battery charger
manufacturer’s instructions to charge the battery to 12.6
volts (100% charge). Batteries should be charged at
room temperature to avoid an undercharge or overcharge
condition. Never attempt to charge a frozen battery.
1 The following table can be used to identify the
approximate amount of time required to charge a
discharged battery. Allow at least 60 minutes after
operating the machine or charging the battery to get an
accurate reading.

STATE CHARGER MAXIMUM RATE

BATTERY
OF
P-30836 VOLTAGE
CHARGE 30 Amps 20 Amps 10 Amps
12.6 V 100% READY TO USE
The simplest and most common check to determine
battery state of charge is to use a digital multimeter or 12.4 V 75% 0.9 hr. 1.3 hr. 2.5 hr.
voltmeter (Item 1) [Figure 300]. 12.2 V 50% 1.9 hr. 2.7 hr. 5.1hr.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

12.0 V 25% 2.9 hr. 4.3 hr. 7.8 hr.
A battery found below 12.4 volts must be charged to
100% charge per the battery charger’s recommendation. 11.8 V 0% 4.0 hr. 5.7 hr. 10.7 hr.
Allow at least 60 minutes after operating the machine
or charging the battery to get an accurate reading. NOTE: Use a good quality automatic charger to avoid
battery damage from overcharging.
If the reading is less than 12.4 volts after the battery has
been charged for several hours, see your Bobcat dealer
to have a more thorough battery test performed.

The freezing point of battery electrolyte is dependent on WARNING

the battery state of charge. Keeping the battery voltage
above 12.4 volts will help prevent batteries from freezing, BATTERY GAS CAN EXPLODE AND CAUSE
even at extremely low temperatures. SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
Keep arcs, sparks, flames and lighted tobacco away
If the battery freezes, the internal grid may be damaged from batteries. When jumping from booster battery
and the case will be distorted or cracked. If this happens, make final connection (negative) at machine frame.
dispose of the battery according to local regulations.
Do not jump start or charge a frozen or damaged
battery. Warm battery to 16°C (60°F) before
connecting to a charger. Unplug charger before
connecting or disconnecting cables to battery. Never
lean over battery while boosting, testing or charging.
W-2066-0910

160 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

160 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Using A Booster Battery (Jump Starting)

Start the engine. After the engine has started, remove

the ground (-) cable first (Item 2) [Figure 301].
IMPORTANT Disconnect the cable from the excavator starter (Item 1)
[Figure 301].
If jump starting the excavator from a second
machine: NOTE: (See Cold Temperature Starting on Page 67.)

When jump starting the excavator from a battery

installed in a second machine, make sure the engine
is NOT running while using the glow plugs. High
voltage spikes from a running machine can burn out IMPORTANT
the glow plugs.
I-2060-0906 Damage to the alternator can occur if:
• Engine is operated with battery cables
If it is necessary to use a booster battery to start the disconnected.
engine, BE CAREFUL! There must be one person in the • Battery cables are connected when using a fast
operator’s seat and one person to connect and charger or when welding on the excavator.
disconnect the battery cables. (Remove both cables from the battery.)
• Extra battery cables (booster cables) are

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Be sure the key switch is OFF. The booster battery must connected wrong.
I-2223-0903
be 12 volt.

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Figure 301
WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.
2
If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities
1 of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
P-97133A
prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807

Connect one end of the first cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive (+) terminal (Item 1)
[Figure 301] of the excavator starter.

Connect one end of the second cable to the negative (-)

terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the starter mounting bolt (Item 2)
[Figure 301].

161 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

161 of 246
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing And Installing The Battery

Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on Page 143.)

Figure 302 Figure 303

1
2

P-97134 P-97138

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

NOTE: For easier access for removing the battery, Remove the bolt (Item 1) [Figure 303] and remove the
remove the lower right cover. To remove side hold-down clamp.
cover, see information in [Figure 307].
Remove the battery.
Disconnect the negative (-) cable (Item 1) [Figure 302]
first. Always clean the terminals and the cable ends, even
when installing a new battery.
Disconnect the positive (+) cable (Item 2) [Figure 302].
Install the battery. Install the hold-down clamp and tighten
the bolts.

Connect the battery cables. Connect the negative (-)

cable (Item 1) [Figure 302] last to prevent sparks.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Batteries contain acid which burns eyes and skin on
contact. Wear goggles, protective clothing and
rubber gloves to keep acid off body.

In case of acid contact, wash immediately with water.

In case of eye contact get prompt medical attention
and wash eye with clean, cool water for at least 15
minutes.

If electrolyte is taken internally drink large quantities

of water or milk! DO NOT induce vomiting. Get
prompt medical attention.
W-2065-0807

162 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

162 of 246
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Figure 305

Checking And Adding Hydraulic Oil

Put the machine on a flat level surface.
Retract the arm and bucket cylinders, extend the boom
cylinder, put the bucket on the ground and lower the 1
blade. Stop the engine.
Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on
Page 143.)
Figure 304
P-97137

B
A Check the condition of the fill strainer screen (Item 1)
[Figure 305]. Clean or replace as necessary.

Be sure the screen is installed before adding fluid.

Add the correct fluid (See [Figure 306]) to the reservoir

until it is visible in the sight gauge. (See Capacities on
Page 240.)

Check the cap and clean as necessary. Replace the cap

2

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

if damaged.

Install the cap.

Close the right side cover and tailgate.

B Hydraulic / Hydrostatic Fluid Chart

1 Figure 306
A
HYDRAULIC / HYDROSTATIC FLUID
RECOMMENDED ISO VISCOSITY GRADE (VG)
P-97135B AND VISCOSITY INDEX (VI)
P-97136

Park the machine in the position shown [Figure 304].

(The preferred method is to check the hydraulic oil when
it is cold.)
Check the hydraulic oil level, it must be visible in the sight
gauge (Item 1) [Figure 304]. The decal on the hydraulic
tank shows the correct fill level.
A - Correct Oil Level COLD (Preferred)
B - Correct Oil Level HOT (Optional)

Clean the surface around the reservoir cap and remove TEMPERATURE RANGE ANTICIPATED
the cap from the reservoir (Item 2) [Figure 304]. DURING MACHINE USE
[1] VG 100; Minimum VI 130
[2] VG 46; Minimum VI 150
WARNING [3] BOBCAT All-Season Fluid
[4] BOBCAT Synthetic Fluid
[5] BOBCAT Biodegradable Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH Fluid (Unlike biodegradable fluids that are vegetable
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames, based, Bobcat biodegradable fluid is formulated to
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil. prevent oxidation and thermal breakdown at operating
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause temperatures.)
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508 Use only recommended fluid in the hydraulic system
[Figure 306].

163 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

163 of 246
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing And Replacing The Hydraulic Filters

Hydraulic Filter

Figure 308

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508 1

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

Figure 307 P-97140

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Remove the hydraulic filter (Item 1) [Figure 308].

Clean the housing where the filter gasket makes contact.

1 1 Put clean hydraulic fluid on the gasket. Install the new

filter and hand tighten only. Use a genuine Bobcat
replacement filter.

P-97139A

Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on

Page 143.)

For easier access to change the hydraulic filter, remove

the lower right side panel.

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) from the side panel (Item
2) [Figure 307]. Remove the side panel.

164 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

164 of 246
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CONT’D)

Removing And Replacing The Hydraulic Filters (Cont’d)

Case Drain Filter

WARNING
AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
W-2103-0508

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

The case drain filter is located in the right front corner of

the excavator.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Open the right side cover. (See RIGHT SIDE COVER on
Page 143.)

For easier access to change the case drain filter, remove

the lower right side panel.

Remove the four bolts (Item 1) from the side panel (Item
2) [Figure 307]. Remove the side panel.

Figure 309

P-97141

Remove the case drain filter (Item 1) [Figure 309].

Clean the housing where the filter gasket makes contact.

Put clean hydraulic fluid on the gasket. Install the new

filter and hand tighten only.(See SERVICE SCHEDULE
on Page 136.)

165 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

165 of 246
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (CONT’D) Figure 311
Removing And Replacing The Hydraulic Fluid

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

WARNING 1

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under pressure can
penetrate skin or eyes, causing serious injury or
P-92959
death. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks. Do
not use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles. If fluid Reposition the drain hose out the bottom of the
enters skin or eyes, get immediate medical attention upperstructure and remove the cap (Item 1)
from a physician familiar with this injury. [Figure 311].
W-2072-0807
Drain the fluid into a container.
Retract the arm and bucket cylinders, lower the bucket to Recycle or dispose of the fluid in an environmentally safe
the ground. Stop the engine. manner.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.) Install the cap (Item 1) [Figure 311] and position the
drain hose back to the storage position (Item 1)
Figure 310 [Figure 310].

Add fluid to the reservoir. (See HYDRAULIC SYSTEM on

Page 163.)

Figure 312

1
P-97142

The hydraulic oil drain hose (Item 1) [Figure 310] is

located below the oil cooler in the right rear corner of the
upperstructure.
P-98041

With the engine OFF, loosen the hose (Item 1)

[Figure 312] on the hydraulic pump until all air is purge
from the system. Tighten the hose after a steady stream
of hydraulic fluid, free of any air bubbles, drains from the
hose. DO NOT RUN THE MACHINE WITH THE HOSE
LOOSE.

Start the engine and operate the machine through the

hydraulic functions. Stop the engine. Check the fluid level
and add as needed.

166 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

166 of 246
SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER Figure 313

Cleaning Procedure

See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service

interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

WARNING 1

AVOID INJURY OR DEATH

When an engine is running in an enclosed area, fresh
air must be added to avoid concentration of exhaust
fumes. If the engine is stationary, vent the exhaust
P-97143
outside. Exhaust fumes contain odorless, invisible
gases which can kill without warning.
W-2050-0807
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 313] from the bottom
of the muffler.

Start the engine and run for about 10 seconds while a

WARNING second person, wearing safety glasses, holds a piece of
wood over the outlet of the muffler. The carbon deposits

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

will be forced out of the muffler plug hole (Item 1)
Stop engine and allow the muffler to cool before
[Figure 313].
cleaning the spark chamber. Wear safety goggles.
Failure to obey can cause serious injury.
Stop the engine. Install and tighten the plug.
W-2011-1285

Close the tailgate.

WARNING
Never use machine in atmosphere with explosive
IMPORTANT
dust or gases or where exhaust can contact This machine is factory equipped with a U.S.D.A.
flammable material. Failure to obey warnings can Forestry Service approved spark arrester exhaust
cause injury or death. system.
W-2068-1285

The spark arrester muffler, if equipped, must be

cleaned to keep it in working condition. The spark
arrester muffler must be serviced by dumping the

WARNING spark chamber every 100 hours of operation.

On some models, the turbocharger functions as the

When the engine is running during service, the spark arrester and must operate correctly for proper
steering levers must be in neutral. spark arrester function.

Failure to do so can cause injury or death. If this machine is operated on flammable forest,
W-2203-0595 brush, or grass covered land, it must be equipped
with a spark arrester attached to the exhaust system
and maintained in working order. Failure to do so will
Do not operate the excavator with a defective exhaust
be in violation of California State Law, Section 4442.
system.
PRC. Refer to local laws and regulations for spark
arrester requirements.
Stop the engine. Open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on I-2284-0111
Page 142.)

167 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

167 of 246
TRACK TENSION

NOTE: The wear of the pins and bushings on the undercarriage vary with the working conditions and the different
types of soil conditions. It is necessary to inspect track tension and maintain the correct tension. See
SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

Adjusting

Figure 314

P-91968

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1

P-91969

Raise one side of the machine (Approximately four

inches) using the boom and arm.

Raise the blade fully and install jackstands under the

blade and track frame (Item 1) [Figure 314]. Lower the
boom until all machine weight is on the jackstands.

Stop the engine.

WARNING
AVOID INJURY
Keep fingers and hands out of pinch points when
checking the track tension.
W-2142-0903

168 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

168 of 246
TRACK TENSION (CONT’D)

Adjusting (Cont’d)

Rubber Track Clearance Steel Track Clearance

Figure 315 Figure 317

Track Frame

17,3 - 30 mm
(0.68 - 1.18 in)

10 - 15 mm Track
(0.39 - 0.59 in)

P-91970 B-15022

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 316 Measure the track clearance at the middle track roller. Do
not get fingers into pinch points between the track and
the track roller. Us a bolt or dowel of the appropriate size
Track
to check the gap between the contact edge of the roller
Frame and the top edge of the track guide [Figure 317].

Steel Track Clearance - 17,3 - 30 mm (0.68 - 1.18 in).

10 - 15 mm
(0.39 - 0.59 in) Figure 318
Track
Roller
1 1

Track
B-14067

Measure the clearance at the middle track roller. Do not

get fingers into pinch points between the track and the
track roller. Use a bolt or a dowel of the appropriate size
to check the gap between the contact edge of the roller
and the top edge of the track guide [Figure 315] and
[Figure 316]. P-91971

Rubber Track Clearance - 10 - 15 mm (0.39 - 0.59 in).

Loosen the two bolts from the cover (Item 1)
[Figure 318]. Pivot the cover downward.

169 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

169 of 246
TRACK TENSION (CONT’D) Repeat the procedure for the opposite side.

Adjusting (Cont’d) With One Piece - Track Tension Fitting

Figure 321
WARNING
HIGH PRESSURE GREASE CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY
• Do not loosen the track tension fitting more than
1 - 1/2 turns.
W-2994-0515

1
With Bleed Screw and Track Tension Fitting
Figure 319

P113712

2 Add grease to the track tension fitting (Item 1)

[Figure 321] until the track tension is correct.

Figure 322

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1
1
P-91972

Add grease to the track tension fitting (Item 1)

[Figure 319] until the track tension is correct.
Figure 320

1 P113712A

The tension removal tool (P/N 7277225) is available and

recommended to direct the flow of grease to aid in
cleanup. Always dispose of the grease in an
environmentally friendly manor.
P-91972A Use tool 7277225 (Item 1) [Figure 322] to loosen the
track tension fitting (Item 1) [Figure 321] to release
The tension removal tool (P/N 6675936) is available and
tension from the track.
recommended to direct the flow of grease to aid in
cleanup. Always dispose of the grease in an
environmentally friendly manor. The tool is sized to fit the one piece track tension fitting
(Item 1) [Figure 321].
Use tool 6675936 (Item 1) [Figure 320] to loosen the
bleed fitting (Item 2) [Figure 319] to release tension from NOTE: Do not loosen the track tension fitting (Item 1)
the track. Do not loosen the bleed fitting more than 1-1/2 [Figure 321] more than 1-1/2 turns.
turns.
Installation: Tighten the track tension fitting to 24 - 30
The tool is sized to fit the bleed fitting (Item 2) N•m (18 - 22 ft-lb) torque.
[Figure 319].
Repeat the procedure for the opposite side.
NOTE: Do not loosen the track tension fitting (Item 1)
[Figure 319].

170 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

170 of 246
TRAVEL MOTOR

Checking And Adding Oil Removing And Replacing Oil

Figure 323 See the SERVICE SCHEDULE for the correct service
interval. (See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)

WARNING
1 AVOID INJURY OR DEATH
Always clean up spilled fuel or oil. Keep heat, flames,
sparks or lighted tobacco away from fuel and oil.
Failure to use care around combustibles can cause
explosion or fire.
2 W-2103-0508

P-97146A Park the excavator on a level surface with plugs (Items 1

and 2) [Figure 323] positioned as shown. Remove both
plugs and drain the lubricant into a container.
Park the excavator on a level surface with the plugs
(Items 1 and 2) [Figure 323] positioned as shown. Install the bottom plug (Item 2). Add lubricant (SAE 90W)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

through the plug hole (Item 1) [Figure 323] until the lube
Remove the plug (Item 1) [Figure 323]. The lube level level is at the bottom edge of the hole. (See Capacities
must be at the bottom edge of the hole. on Page 240.)

Add lubricant (SAE 90W) through the hole (Item 1) Install the plug (Item 1) [Figure 323].
[Figure 323] if the lube level is low.
Repeat the procedure for the opposite travel motor.
Repeat the procedure for the opposite travel motor.

171 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

171 of 246
ALTERNATOR BELT

Belt Adjustment

The alternator belt is a special maintenance free type Figure 325

that is pretensioned over the pulleys. This belt eliminates
the need for a tensioning device and does not require
periodic adjustment. Contact your Bobcat dealer for
replacement parts. 1

Belt Replacement

Stop the engine and open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE

on Page 142.)

NOTE: If the machine is equipped with air

conditioning, the compressor belt will need to
be removed before the alternator belt can be
removed.
P-97148
Removal

Figure 324 The engine will need to be rotated by hand to remove the
belt. To access the flywheel, remove the plug (Item 1)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[Figure 325] from the flywheel housing. (A pry bar will be
1 needed to rotate the flywheel to assist in belt removal and
installation.)
1
Figure 326

1
P-98361

Remove the air conditioning compressor belt (if

equipped). (See AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR
BELT on Page 174.)
P-97149
Remove the three bolts (Item1) and remove the fan guard
(Item 2) [Figure 324].
Use a pry bar between the belt and the crankshaft pulley
(Item 1) [Figure 326].

Using a pry bar on the flywheel, rotate the engine by

hand to push the belt off the crankshaft pulley. Continue
to rotate the flywheel until the belt is loose.

172 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

172 of 246
ALTERNATOR BELT (CONT’D)

Belt Replacement (Cont’d)

Figure 327 Installation

Position the belt (Item 1) [Figure 327] over the fan

blades.

Figure 328

1
P-97150

Remove the belt (Item 1) [Figure 327] by sliding it over

the fan blades.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-97151

Install the belt (Item 1) [Figure 328] over the alternator

pulley, the crankshaft pulley and over the fan spacer.

Use a pry bar (Item 2) [Figure 328] to position the belt

onto the fan pulley.

Using a pry bar, rotate the flywheel by hand while using

the second pry bar to install the belt over the fan pulley.

Continue to rotate the engine by hand until the belt is fully

on the pulleys.

Reinstall the rubber plug (Item 1) [Figure 325].

Install the fan guard (Item 2) with the three bolts (Item1)
[Figure 324].

Close the tailgate.

173 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

173 of 246
AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT

Belt Adjustment

The fan belt is a special maintenance free type that is pretensioned over the pulleys. This belt eliminates the need for a
tensioning device and does not require periodic adjustment. Contact your Bobcat dealer for replacement parts.

Belt Replacement

Stop the engine and open the tailgate. (See TAILGATE on Page 142.)

Removal Installation

Figure 329 Figure 331

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

P-97148 P-97153

The engine will need to be rotated by hand to remove the Position the belt (Item 1) [Figure 331] over the
belt. To access the flywheel, remove the plug (Item 1) crankshaft pulley and to the compressor pulley.
[Figure 329] from the flywheel housing.
Use a pry bar (Item 2) [Figure 331] to position the belt on
Figure 330 the pulley while using the second pry bar at the flywheel
to rotate the engine by hand.

Continue to rotate the engine by hand until the belt is fully

on the pulleys.
1
Reinstall the rubber plug (Item 1) [Figure 329].

Close the tailgate.

P-97152

Use a pry bar (Item 1) [Figure 330] to push the belt off of
the pulley. Using a pry bar on the flywheel, rotate the
engine by hand to push the belt off the crankshaft pulley.
Continue to rotate the flywheel until the belt is loose.
Remove the belt.

174 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

174 of 246
X-CHANGE PIN GRABBER QUICK COUPLER

Inspection And Maintenance Inspection And Maintenance

Figure 332 Figure 333

P-49712 P113092

Inspect the X-Change for wear or damage. Inspect the X- Inspect the pin grabber clasps (Item 1) and the pins (Item
Change pins (Item 1) and hooks (Item 2) [Figure 332] 2) [Figure 333] (on the attachment) for wear or damage.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

(on the attachment) for wear or damage.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
Pin Grabber Quick Coupler Troubleshooting

If the Pin Grabber Quick Coupler does not function

correctly, the following components may need servicing.
See your Bobcat dealer for service.

BUZZER / BLINK CODES COMPONENT

1 beep / 1 blink (repeating) Solenoid
2 beep / 2 blink (repeating) Pressure Sender
3 blink (repeating) Buzzer
Buzzer sounds / LED not lit Switch LED

TRACK ROLLER AND IDLER LUBRICATION

Procedure

The track rollers and idlers require no maintenance. The

bearings are a sealed design.

175 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

175 of 246
BUCKET

Bucket Teeth Removal And Installation

WARNING
Wear safety glasses to prevent eye injury when any
of the following conditions exist:
• Pressurized fluids and springs or other stored
energy components.
• Flying debris or loose material is present.
• Engine is running.
• Tools are being used.
W-2505-0604

Position the bucket so the bucket teeth are at a 30° angle

up from the ground for accessibility to the teeth.

Lower the boom until the bucket is fully on the ground.

Stop the engine and exit the excavator.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 334

1 2

3
P-69201A

The retaining pin (Item 1) must be installed as shown

[notch (Item 2) to the front] for proper fit and tooth
retention. The side of the tooth point (Item 3)
[Figure 334] also shows the correct orientation of the
retaining pin.

Installation: Position the new tooth point on the shank

and install a new retaining pin. Install the retaining pin
until it is flush with the top of the point.

176 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

176 of 246
CUTTING EDGE (ANGLE BLADE ONLY)

Removal And Installation

Figure 335 Figure 337

1
1 1
1 1 1 1

P-92276 P-72779

Raise the blade fully and install jackstands (Item 1) Remove the seven nuts (Item 1) [Figure 337] and bolts
[Figure 335] under the blade arms. from the cutting edge.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 336 Lower the jack and remove the cutting edge.

Installation: Tighten nuts to 125 N•m (90 ft-lb) torque.

NOTE: Cutting edge is reversible and replaceable.

P-72782A

Place a jack under the cutting edge [Figure 336].

177 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

177 of 246
LUBRICATION OF THE HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

Lubrication Locations

Lubricate the excavator as specified in the SERVICE Figure 339

SCHEDULE for the best performance of the machine.
(See SERVICE SCHEDULE on Page 136.)
6
Always use a good quality lithium based multipurpose
grease when lubricating the machine. Apply the lubricant
until extra grease shows.

NOTE: Use Extra Heavy Gear Shield grease for

grease fittings (Item 20, 21 and 22).

Lubricate the following locations on the excavator EVERY

5 7
8 - 10 HOURS:

Figure 338
P-92942

5. Angle Blade Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 339] (If

4 Equipped)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

3
6. Angle Blade Cylinder Base End (1) [Figure 339] (If
Equipped)
1
3
2 7. Angle Blade Pivot (1) [Figure 339] (If Equipped)

Figure 340

P-97237 8

Ref Description (# of Fittings)

1. Blade Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 338]

2. Blade Cylinder Base End (1) [Figure 338]

3. Blade Pivots (2) [Figure 338]

8
4. Boom Cylinder Base End (1) [Figure 338]
9 P-91977A

8. Boom Swing Pivot (2) [Figure 340]

9. Boom Swing Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 340]

178 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

178 of 246
LUBRICATION OF THE HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR (CONT’D)

Lubrication Locations (Cont’d)

Figure 341 Figure 343

12
10

13

P-97154 P-91980

10. Boom Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 341] 12. Arm Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 343]

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Figure 342 13. Arm Pivot (1) [Figure 343]

Figure 344

14

11

P-91979

P-91981
11. Arm Cylinder Base End (1) [Figure 342]

14. Bucket Cylinder Base End (1) [Figure 344]

179 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

179 of 246
LUBRICATION OF THE HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR Figure 346
(CONT’D)

Lubrication Locations (Cont’d) 21 20

Figure 345

16
15

19
P-91982A

18
Lubricate the following locations on the hydraulic
excavator EVERY 50 HOURS:

17 NOTE: Use Extra Heavy Gear Shield grease for

grease fittings (Item 20, 21 and 22).
P-97155
20. Swing Circle (1) [Figure 346]
15. Bucket Cylinder Rod End (1) [Figure 345]
21. Swing Pinion (1) [Figure 346] (Install 3 to 4 pumps of

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

grease then rotate the upperstructure 90°. Install 3 to
16. Bucket Link Pin (1) [Figure 345]
4 pumps of grease and again rotate the
upperstructure 90°. Repeat this until the slew pinion
17. Bucket Pivot (3) [Figure 345]
has been greased at four positions.)
18. Bucket Link (2) [Figure 345]
Figure 347
19. Arm (1) [Figure 345]

22
P-95527

Lubricate the following location on the hydraulic

excavator EVERY 1000 HOURS:

NOTE: Use Extra Heavy Gear Shield grease for

grease fittings (Item 20, 21 and 22).

22. Boom Swing Cylinder Base (1) [Figure 347]

NOTE: The boom swing grease fitting is located on

the side of base end of the cylinder.

180 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

180 of 246
PIVOT PINS

Inspection And Maintenance

Figure 348

2
3
1
2

P-97238

The pivots and cylinders (Item 1) have a large pin held in

position with a bolt (Item 2) and double nuts (Item 3)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

[Figure 348] securing the pin.

The two nuts (Item 3) are used as jam nuts to hold the
bolt (Item 2) with out tightening the bolt (Item 2) to the pin
boss. After the nuts (Item 3) are tightened together, the
bolt (Item 2) should be free to spin. See your Bobcat
dealer for replacement parts.

181 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

181 of 246
EXCAVATOR STORAGE AND RETURN TO SERVICE

Storage Return To Service

Sometimes it may be necessary to store your Bobcat After the Bobcat excavator has been in storage, it is
excavator for an extend period of time. Below is a list of necessary to follow a list of items to return the excavator
items to perform before storage. to service.

• Thoroughly clean the excavator including the engine • Check the engine and hydraulic oil levels; check
compartment. coolant level.

• Lubricate the excavator. • Install a fully charged battery.

• Replace worn or damaged parts. • Remove grease from exposed cylinder rods.

• Drive the excavator onto planks in a dry protected • Check all belt tensions.
shelter.
• Be sure all shields and guards are in place.
• Lower the boom fully with the bucket flat on the
ground. • Lubricate the excavator.

• Put grease on any exposed cylinder rods. • Remove cover from exhaust pipe opening.

• Put fuel stabilizer in the fuel tank and run the engine • Start the engine and let run for a few minutes while

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

a few minutes to circulate the stabilizer to the pump observing the instrument panels and systems for
and fuel injectors. correct operation.

• Drain and flush the cooling system. Refill with • Drive the excavator off of the planks.
premixed coolant.
• Operate machine, check for correct function.
• Replace all fluids and filters (engine, hydraulic).
• Stop the engine and check for leaks. Repair as
• Replace all filters (i.e.: air cleaner, heater, etc.). needed.

• Put all controls in NEUTRAL position.

• Remove the battery. Be sure the electrolyte level is

correct then charge the battery. Store it in a cool dry
place above freezing temperatures and charge it
periodically during storage.

• Cover the exhaust pipe opening.

• Tag the machine to indicate that it is in storage

condition.

• Clean the three HVAC drain valves.

182 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

182 of 246
 SYSTEM SETUP AND ANALYSIS

DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Viewing Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Number Codes List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

CONTROL PANEL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Password Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Changing The Owner Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Password Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENT PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Password Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Changing The Owner Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Changing The User Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Password Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

MAINTENANCE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Standard Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Deluxe Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

183 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

183 of 246
DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES

Viewing Service Codes

The Service Codes will aid your dealer in diagnosing Deluxe Instrument Panel
conditions that can damage your machine.
The last 40 codes stored in history can also be viewed
Standard Instrument Panel using the Deluxe Instrument Panel.

Figure 349

Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the
1 Active Warnings screen
icon (Inset) is highlighted.

1 1

The ACTIVE WARNINGS

screen displays active
2 service codes. Press [9]
to view the next service
code if more than one is
P-97989 present. Press [4] to

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

display a history of service
codes.
Press the Information button (Item 2) to cycle the data
display (Item 1) [Figure 349] until the service code The WARNINGS
screen is displayed. If more than one service code is HISTORY screen will list
present, the codes will scroll on the data display. the Service Code Number
(CODE), Hourmeter
When no service code is present, [NONE] is displayed reading when the error
[Figure 349]. occurred (HOUR), and the
User (USER) who was
NOTE: Corroded or loose grounds can cause logged in to operate the
multiple service codes and / or abnormal machine when the error
symptoms. All instrument panel lights occurred.
flashing, alarm sounding, headlights and Press [9] to view the next eight service codes.
taillights flashing, can indicate a bad ground. 
The same symptoms can apply if the voltage A total of 40 codes can be stored. When more than 40
is low, such as loose or corroded battery codes occur, the oldest code will disappear and the
cables. If you observe these symptoms, check newest code will be in the number 1 position.
grounds and positive leads first.
Press the list number next
to the service code for
more detail.

Press the left scroll button
to back up one screen.

184 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

184 of 246
DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES (CONT'D)

Number Codes List

CODE CODE
E0105 Throttle actuator short to battery L0102 Lights Button Error On
E0106 Throttle actuator short to ground L0202 High Flow Button Error On
E0107 Throttle actuator open circuit L0302 Auxiliary Button Error On
L0402 Information Button Error On
E0123 Throttle actuator not calibrated
L7404 Gateway Controller No Communication
E0321 5 volt supply out of range high
E0322 5 volt supply out of range low L7672 Left Hand Panel Programming Error

E0421 Throttle sensor out of range high

E0422 Throttle sensor out of range low M0216 Hydraulic Filter Not Connected
M0217 Hydraulic Filter Plugged
E0521 Throttle actuator feedback out of range high
E0522 Throttle actuator feedback out of range low M0309 Battery Voltage Low
M0310 Battery Voltage High
E3128 Interrupted power failure log only M0311 Battery Voltage Extremely High
M0314 Battery Voltage Extremely Low

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

E3297 Controller programmed log only M0322 Battery Voltage Out of Range Low

M0414 Engine Oil Pressure Extremely Low

M0415 Engine Oil Pressure Shutdown
H2521 Angle Blade Control Switch Out of Range High
H2522 Angle Blade Control Switch Out of Range Low
H2524 Angle Blade Control Switch Out of NEUTRAL M0610 Engine Speed High
M0611 Engine Speed Extremely High
H2605 Angle Blade Base Solenoid Short to Battery M0613 Engine Speed No Signal
H2606 Angle Blade base Solenoid Short to Ground M0615 Engine Speed Shutdown
H2607 Angle Blade Base Solenoid Open Circuit M0618 Engine Speed Out of Range
H2632 Angle Blade Base Solenoid Overcurrent

H2705 Angle Blade Rod Solenoid Short to Battery M0710 Hydraulic Oil Temperature High
H2706 Angle Blade Rod Solenoid Short to Ground M0711 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Extremely High
H2707 Angle Blade Rod Solenoid Open Circuit M0715 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Shutdown
H2732 Angle Blade Rod Solenoid Overcurrent M0721 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Out of Range High
M0722 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Out of Range Low
H3128 Interrupted Power Failure
M0810 Engine Coolant Temperature High
H4423 Secondary Controller Not Programmed M0811 Engine Coolant Temperature Extremely High
H4497 Secondary Controller Programmed M0815 Engine Coolant Temperature Shutdown
M0821 Engine Coolant Temperature Out of Range High
H4621 5V Sensor Supply Out of Range High M0822 Engine Coolant Temperature Out of Range Low
H4622 5V Sensor Supply Out of Range Low M0216 Hydraulic Filter Not Connected

H7404 Main Controller No Communication

H7604 Display No Communication

185 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

185 of 246
DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE CODE (CONT’D)

Number Codes List (Cont’d)

CODE CODE
M0909 Fuel Level Low M2721 Throttle Sensor Out of Range High
M0921 Fuel Level Out of Range High M2722 Throttle Sensor Out of Range Low
M0922 Fuel Level Out of Range Low
M3128 Interrupted Power Failure
M1121 Console Sensor Out of Range High
M1122 Console Sensor Out of Range Low M3204 Throttle Controller No Communication
M1128 Console Sensor Failure
M3304 Deluxe Panel No Communication
M1305 Fuel Hold Solenoid Short to Battery
M1306 Fuel Hold Solenoid Short to Ground M3404 RFID Key Controller No Communication
M1307 Fuel Hold Solenoid Open Circuit
M3702 Hyd Exchange Output Error On
M1402 Fuel Pull Output Error On M3703 Hyd Exchange Output Error Off
M1403 Fuel Pull Output Error Off
M1407 Fuel Pull Output Open Circuit
M1428 Fuel Pull Output Failure
M4109 Alternator Low

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

M1705 Hydraulics Enable Solenoid Short to Battery M4110 Alternator High
M1706 Hydraulics Enable Solenoid Short to Ground
M1707 Hydraulics Enable Solenoid Open Circuit M4304 Keyless Start Panel No Communication
M1732 Hydraulics Enable Solenoid Overcurrent
M4404 Secondary Controller No Communication
M2005 Two-Speed Solenoid Short to Battery
M2006 Two-Speed Solenoid Short to Ground M4621 5V Sensor Supply Out of Range High
M2007 Two-Speed Solenoid Open Circuit M4622 5V Sensor Supply Out of Range Low

M2102 Glow Plug Output Error On M4721 8V Sensor Supply Out of Range High
M2103 Glow Plug Output Error Off M4722 8V Sensor Supply Out of Range Low
M2107 Glow Plug Output Open Circuit
M2128 Glow Plug Output Failure M5002 Light Output Error On
M5003 Light Output Error Off
M2202 Starter Output Error On
M2203 Starter Output Error Off M5205 Offset Base Solenoid Short to Battery
M2207 Starter Output Open Circuit M5206 Offset Base Solenoid Short to Ground
M2228 Starter Output Failure M5207 Offset Base Solenoid Open Circuit
M5232 Offset Base Solenoid Overcurrent
M2302 Starter Relay Error On
M2303 Starter Relay Error Off M5305 Offset Rod Solenoid Error On
M5306 Offset Rod Solenoid Short to Ground
M2402 Fuel Pull Relay Error On M5307 Offset Rod Solenoid Open Circuit
M2403 Fuel Pull Relay Error Off M5332 Offset Rod Solenoid Overcurrent

M2521 Load Sense Sensor Out of Range High M5421 Offset Control Switch Out of Range High
M2522 Load Sense Sensor Out of Range Low M5422 Offset Control Switch Out of Range Low
M5424 Offset Control Switch Out of NEUTRAL
M2602 Glow Plug Relay Error On
M2603 Glow Plug Relay Error Off

186 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

186 of 246
DIAGNOSTICS SERVICE CODE (CONT’D)

Number Codes List (Cont’d)

CODE CODE
M5505 Auxiliary Base Solenoid Short to Battery M7423 Main Controller Not Programmed
M5506 Auxiliary Base Solenoid Short to Ground M7497 Main Controller Software Updated
M5507 Auxiliary Base Solenoid Open Circuit
M5532 Auxiliary Base Solenoid Overcurrent M7604 Standard Display Panel No Communication

M5605 Auxiliary Rod Solenoid Short to Battery M7748 Key Switch Multiple
M5606 Auxiliary Rod Solenoid Short to Ground
M5607 Auxiliary Rod Solenoid Open Circuit M7839 Hourmeter Changed
M5632 Auxiliary Rod Solenoid Overcurrent

M5721 Auxiliary Control Switch Out of Range High

M5722 Auxiliary Control Switch Out of Range Low
M5724 Auxiliary Control Switch Out of NEUTRAL

M6204 Load Moment Sensor In Error R7404 No Communication To Main Controller

M6402 Switched Power Relay Error On

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

M6403 Switched Power Relay Error Off

M6702 HVAC Output Error On

M6703 HVAC Output Error Off

M6905 Hydraulic Throttle Solenoid Short to Battery

M6906 Hydraulic Throttle Solenoid Short to Battery
M6907 Hydraulic Throttle Solenoid Open Circuit
M6923 Hydraulic Throttle Solenoid Not Calibrated
M6932 Hydraulic Throttle Solenoid Overcurrent

M7002 Switched Power Output Error On

M7003 Switched Power Output Error Off
M7007 Switched Power Output Open Circuit
M7028 Switched Power Output Failure

187 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

187 of 246
CONTROL PANEL SETUP

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel)

Icon Identification Vitals

Figure 350

Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the
Vitals screen icon (Inset)
is highlighted.
1 1

Displays select system

operating levels.

P-97990

You can monitor real-time displays of:



Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

ICON DESCRIPTION
Engine Speed (RPM)
Engine Coolant Temperature
DATE / TIME
System Voltage
Hydraulic Fluid Temperature
USER / USER HOURS

MACHINE HOURS (HOURMETER) The Deluxe Instrument Panel is easy to use. Continue to
set your own preferences for operating / monitoring your
Bobcat excavator.
ACTIVE WARNINGS screen icon

VITALS screen icon

SERVICE screen icon

AUTO IDLE Status icon

ATTACHMENTS screen icon

MACHINE SETTINGS screen icon

DISPLAY screen icon

HOME icon (Return to MAIN screen)

LEFT SCROLL button


RIGHT SCROLL button

ENTER button

188 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

188 of 246
CONTROL PANEL SETUP (CONT’D)

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) (Cont’d)

Date And Time Languages

Press a scroll button (Item Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the 1) repeatedly until the
Display screen icon (Inset) Display screen icon (Inset)
is highlighted. is highlighted.

1 1 1 1

Select [1. CLOCKS]. Select [2. LANGUAGES].

Select [1. TIME].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Select the desired
language.

Use the keypad to enter

English / Metric Display
time.

Select AM / PM / 24hr.

Press [ENTER] to Press a scroll button (Item
continue. 1) repeatedly until the
Display screen icon (Inset)
Select [2. DATE]. is highlighted.

1 1

Select [4. DISPLAY

SETTINGS].

Press [1] to cycle between

ENGLISH and METRIC.
Use the keypad to enter
date.

Press [ENTER] to
continue.

189 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

189 of 246
CONTROL PANEL SETUP (CONT’D)

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) (Cont’d)

Auto Idle Time Delay Job Clock Reset

Press a scroll button (Item Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the 1) repeatedly until the
Security screen icon Security screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted. (Inset) is highlighted.

1 1 1 1

Select [3. MACHINE Select [1. PASSWORDS /

PERFORMANCE]. LOCKOUTS].

Select [1. AUTO IDLE Enter owner password

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

DELAY TIME]. and press [ENTER].

Select [1. USER

Use the keypad to enter
SETTINGS].
the desired delay time
between 4 and 250
seconds.

Press [ENTER] to save
and continue. Press left
scroll button to exit without
saving.

Select user.

Press [9] to reset job

statistics.

Press left scroll button or
[0] to exit without saving.

190 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

190 of 246
CONTROL PANEL SETUP (CONT’D)

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) (Cont’d)

Alarm Clock Reset ECO MODE

Press a scroll button (Item Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the 1) repeatedly until the
Display screen icon (Inset) Security screen icon
is highlighted. (Inset) is highlighted.

1 1 1 1

Select [3. ALARM Select [3. MACHINE

CLOCK]. PERFORMANCE].

Select [1. OFF ONCE], Select [2. ECO MODE].

Select [2. ON Daily] or

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Select [3. ON WEEKLY]. 
ECO Mode will set the
maximum engine rpm to
be at 85% of the high idle
setting.

Select [1. OFF / ON], Example: If the machine
Select [2. TIME] or maximum engine speed is
Select [3. DAILY]. 2450 rpm, when ECO
Mode is enabled, the
maximum engine speed
will be approximately 2080
rpm.

Use key pad numbers to

set time.
Select [7. AM],
Select [8. PM] or
Select [9. 24 hr clock].


Select [ENTER] to save.
Press left scroll to back
space numbers.
Press [4] to set alarm to
sleep. (When pressed,
display will return to main
screen.)

Press [9] to shut off alarm.
Alarm will still be active for
the next day alarm setting.
(When pressed, display
will return to main screen.)

191 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

191 of 246
CONTROL PANEL SETUP (CONT’D)

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) (Cont’d)

Machine History - Log In Information Machine History - User Job Statistics

Press a scroll button (Item Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the 1) repeatedly until the
Security screen icon Security screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted. (Inset) is highlighted.

1 1 1 1

MACHINE SETTINGS is MACHINE SETTINGS is

visible on screen. visible on screen.

Select [2. MACHINE Select [2. MACHINE

HISTORY]. HISTORY].

Select [1. LOG-IN Select [2. USER JOB

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

INFORMATION]. STATISTICS].

View User Log hours and View Job Statistics (Job

last time / dated used. Hours / Idle Time

Individual information can .

be viewed and reset back Information can be viewed
to zero. and reset back to zero.


Select user [KEY PAD 1 -

9] to access individual
user.

192 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

192 of 246
PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START PANEL)

Panel Setup (Deluxe Instrument Panel) (Cont’d)

Machine History - Overall Job Statistics Attachments

Press a scroll button (Item Press a scroll button (Item

1) repeatedly until the 1) repeatedly until the
Security screen icon Attachment screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted. (Inset) is highlighted.

1 1 1 1

MACHINE SETTINGS is
ATTACHMENTS is visible
visible on screen.
on screen.
Select [2. MACHINE
Press [ENTER].
HISTORY].

Select [3. OVERALL JOB Press [4] or [9] repeatedly

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

STATISTICS]. until the desired
Attachment is visible in
the display screen.

Information about the

attachment,
recommended auxiliary
hydraulic flow and tips
about attachment
operation will be
displayed.

193 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

193 of 246
PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START PANEL) Password Lockout Feature
(CONT’D)
This feature allows the owner to unlock the password
Password Description feature so that a password does not need to be used
every time the engine is started.
Master Password:
Turn the start switch (Item 1) [Figure 352] to the ON
A permanent, randomly selected password set at the position to turn on the excavators electrical system.
factory that cannot be changed. This password is
used for service by the Bobcat dealer if the owner Enter the five digit owner password using the number
password is not known or to change the owner keys (1 through 0).
password.
Figure 352
Owner Password:

Allows for full use of the excavator. Must be used to

change the owner password.

Changing The Owner Password

Turn the start switch (Item 1) [Figure 351] to the ON 1

position to turn on the excavators electrical system.

Enter the five digit owner password using the number 3

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

keys (1 through 0) if locked.
2
Figure 351
P113012

Press the unlock key (Item 2) [Figure 352].

The left panel display screen will show [CODE].

Enter the five digit owner password using the number

1 keys (1 through 0). The unlock key green light will flash,
then become solid.

The excavator can now be started without using a

2 password.
3
NOTE: Use the following procedure to reset the
machine lock so that the excavator requires a
P113012 password to start the engine.

Turn the start switch to the ON position to turn on the

Press and hold the lock (Item 2) and unlock (Item 3)
excavators electrical system.
[Figure 351] keys for 2 seconds.
Press the lock key (Item 3) [Figure 352].
The lock key red light will flash and the instrument panel
display screen will show [ENTER].
The lock key red light will flash and the left panel display
screen will show [CODE].
Enter a new five digit owner password using the number
keys (1 through 0). An asterisk will show in the left panel
Enter the five digit owner password using the number
display screen for each key press. keys (1 through 0). The unlock key green light will flash,
then the lock key red light will become solid.
The instrument panel display screen will show [AGAIN].
You must now enter the password every time to start the
Enter the new five digit owner password again. excavator.

The lock key red light will become solid.

194 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

194 of 246
PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENT PANEL)

Password Setup is available on machines with a Deluxe Changing The Owner Password
Instrument Panel.

Password Description
Press a scroll button (Item
All new machines with a Deluxe Instrument Panel arrive 1) repeatedly until the
at Bobcat dealerships with the keypad in locked mode. Security screen icon
Locked mode means that a password must be used to (Inset) is highlighted.
start the engine. 1 1

For security purposes, your dealer may change the Select [1. PASSWORDS /
password and set the keypad in the locked mode. Your LOCKOUTS].
dealer will provide you with the password.

Master Password:

A permanent, randomly selected password set at the

factory that cannot be changed. This password is Enter owner password
used for service by the Bobcat dealer if the owner and press [ENTER].
password is not known or to change the owner
password.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Owner Password:

Allows for full use of the excavator and to set up the

Deluxe Instrument Panel. There is only one owner Select [1. USER
password. The owner password must be used to SETTINGS].
change the owner or user passwords. Owner should
change the password as soon as possible for security
of the excavator.

User Password:
Select [1. OWNER].
Allows starting and operating the excavator; cannot
change password or any of the other setup features.

For the procedures to change passwords: (See Changing

The Owner Password on Page 195.) and (See Changing
The User Passwords on Page 196.)
Select [2. CHANGE
PASSWORD].

Enter new owner

password and press
[ENTER].

You will be prompted to
reenter the new owner
password.

195 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

195 of 246
PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENT PANEL) (CONT’D)

Changing The User Passwords Password Lockout Feature

This feature allows the owner to unlock the password

feature so that a password does not need to be used
Press a scroll button (Item every time the engine is started.
1) repeatedly until the
Security screen icon
(Inset) is highlighted.
1 1 Press a scroll button (Item
1) repeatedly until the
Select [1. PASSWORDS / Security screen icon
LOCKOUTS]. (Inset) is highlighted.
1 1

Select [1. PASSWORDS /

LOCKOUTS].

Enter owner password

and press [ENTER].

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Enter owner password
and press [ENTER].

Select [1. USER

SETTINGS].

Select [2. MACHINE

LOCK].

Select user.

NOTE: The procedure above can be followed to reset

the machine lock so that the machine requires
Select [2. CHANGE a password to start the engine.
PASSWORD].
NOTE: When the password is in UNLOCKED, no
password is needed. The start switch is used
to start the machine.

Enter new user password

and press [ENTER].

196 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

196 of 246
MAINTENANCE CLOCK

Description Setup

The Maintenance Clock alerts the operator when the next See your Bobcat dealer about installation of this feature.
service interval is due. EXAMPLE: The maintenance
clock can be set to a 500 hour interval as a reminder for Reset
the next 500 hour planned maintenance.
Figure 354
Standard Instrument Panel
1
Figure 353

2
1

3
NA3086
P113049

During machine operation, a 2 beep alarm will sound Press the Information button (Item 2) [Figure 354] until
when there are less than 10 hours until the next planned the display screen shows the maintenance clock.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

maintenance.
Press and hold the Information button (Item 2) for 7
The remaining hours before maintenance is required seconds until [RESET] (Item 1) [Figure 354] appears in
(Item 1) will appear in the data display for 5 seconds the display screen.
while the service icon (Item 3) and the hourmeter icon
(Item 2) [Figure 353] flash.

NOTE: The display will show negative numbers after

counting down to zero.

The display will revert to the previous display and will

appear for 5 seconds every time the machine is started
until the maintenance clock is reset.

197 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

197 of 246
MAINTENANCE CLOCK (CONT’D)

Deluxe Instrument Panel Figure 356

Figure 355

1
1

P113047

P113048
The Deluxe Instrument Panel (if equipped) will display a
bar (Item 1) [Figure 356] showing the time remaining
The Deluxe Instrument Panel (if equipped) will display a until next service. This bar will turn red when service is
message (Item 1) [Figure 355] alerting the operator to past due. NEXT MAINTENANCE DUE will change to

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

service the machine. MAINTENANCE PAST DUE and display the number of
hours past due.
This message will remain for 10 seconds and will appear
for 10 seconds every time the machine is started until the Keys [4] and [9] can be used to adjust the service
maintenance clock is reset. interval when the owner is logged in [Figure 356].

To reset the service clock after servicing the machine,

press and hold key [1] [Figure 356] (when the owner is
logged in) until the bar graph resets to 0. [Figure 356]

198 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

198 of 246
 MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS

MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Service Schedule (7238018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Warning (7178178) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Lift Chart (7188434) With Standard Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Lift Chart (7188442) With Standard Arm W/Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Lift Chart (7188436) With Long Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Warning (7148157) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Warning (7178177) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Warning (6708929) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Warning (7189532) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Warning (7185933) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Warning (7148145) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Warning (7148147) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Using the X-Change (6818059) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Using the X-Change System (7220131) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Using the Pin Grabber Attachment Coupler System (7220038) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Joystick Control Pattern Selector Lever (7178179) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Warning (6810004) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Warning (7169006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

199 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

199 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS

Service Schedule (7238018)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

200 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

200 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Service Schedule (7238018) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

201 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

201 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Service Schedule (7238018) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

202 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

202 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7178178)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

203 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

203 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188434) With Standard Arm

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

204 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

204 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188434) With Standard Arm (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

205 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

205 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188434) With Standard Arm (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

206 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

206 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188442) With Standard Arm W/Counterweight

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

207 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

207 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188442) With Standard Arm W/Counterweight (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

208 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

208 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188442) With Standard Arm W/Counterweight (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

209 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

209 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188436) With Long Arm

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

210 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

210 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188436) With Long Arm (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

211 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

211 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Lift Chart (7188436) With Long Arm (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

212 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

212 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7148157)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

213 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

213 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7148157) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

214 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

214 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7178177)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

215 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

215 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7178177) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

216 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

216 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7178177) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

217 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

217 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (6708929) Warning (7185933)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Warning (7189532)

218 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

218 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (7148145) Warning (7148147)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

219 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

219 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change (6818059)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

220 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

220 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change (6818059) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

221 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

221 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change (6818059) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

222 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

222 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change System (7220131)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

223 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

223 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change System (7220131) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

224 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

224 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the X-Change System (7220131) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

225 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

225 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the Pin Grabber Attachment Coupler System (7220038)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

226 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

226 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the Pin Grabber Attachment Coupler System (7220038) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

227 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

227 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Using the Pin Grabber Attachment Coupler System (7220038) (Cont’d)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

228 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

228 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Joystick Control Pattern Selector Lever (7178179)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

229 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

229 of 246
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS (CONT’D)

Warning (6810004) Warning (7169006)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

230 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

230 of 246
 SPECIFICATIONS

EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Standard Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Long Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Angle Blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Hydraulic Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Hydraulic Cycle Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Slew System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Ground Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

231 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

231 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS

E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions

• Where applicable, specification conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

997 mm
(539.2 in) 586 mm
(23.1 in)

1874 mm
(73.8 in)
1960 mm
(77.2 in)
2074 mm
(81.7 in)

125 mm 872 mm
(4.9 in) (34.3 in)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

STD ARM LONG ARM
5555 mm 5563 mm 1700 mm
(218.7 in) (219.0 in) (66.9 in)
STD ARM LONG ARM
4294 mm 4302 mm
(169.1 in) (169.4 in)

2532 mm
(99.7 in)

640 mm 446 mm
(25.2 in) (17.6 in) 1960 mm
1998 mm
(77.2 in)
(78.7 in)

2523 mm
(99.3 in)

NA5066

232 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

232 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Standard Arm

• Where applicable, specification conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

6062 mm
(238.7 in)

185° 5595 mm
(220.3 in)

116°
3924 mm
(154.5 in)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

384 mm
(15.1 in)
27° 2019 mm
(79.5 in)

465 mm
(18.3 in) 2163 mm 1926 mm
(85.2 in) (75.8 in)

3524 mm
(138.7 in)

5939 mm
(233.8 in)

NA5067

233 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

233 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Long Arm

• Where applicable, specification conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

6441 mm
(253.6 in)

185° 5850 mm
(230.3 in)

116°
4179 mm
(164.5 in)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

384 mm
(15.1 in)
27° 1631 mm
(64.2 in)

465 mm
(18.3 in) 2019 mm 3199 mm
(79.5 in) (126.8 in)

3923 mm
(154.5 in)

6333 mm
(249.3 in)

NA5067

234 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

234 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

E50 Excavator Machine Dimensions - Angle Blade

• Where applicable, specification conform to SAE or ISO standards and are subject to change without notice.

2085 mm 433 mm
(82.1 in) (17.1 in)

1642 mm 5 mm
25°
(64.6 in) (0.2 in)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

1798 mm
(70.8 in)
1976 mm
(77.8 in)

128 mm
(5.1 in) 196 mm
2461 mm (7.7 in)
(96.9 in)

467 mm
(18.4 in)

24°

569 mm
(22.4 in) NA5030A

235 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

235 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Performance

E50
Operating weight (canopy w/ rubber
tracks, and 610 mm (24 in) bucket) 4843 kg (10677 lb)
If equipped with the following, add: Steel tracks, add 131kg (289 lb);
Cab w/ Heater, add 121 kg (267 lb);
Cab w/ HVAC, add 140 kg (309 lb);
Long Arm (with additional counterweight), add 235 kg (518 lb);
Additional Counterweight 204 kg (450 lb);
Angle Blade, add 157 kg (346 lb)
Hydraulic Clamp, add 99 kg (218 lb)
Pro Clamp System, Add 144 kg (317 lb)
Travel Speed (Low / High) 3,1 kph (1.9 mph) / 5,0 kph (3.1 mph)
Digging Force (per ISO 6015)
With Standard Arm Arm - 29997 N (6744 lbf)
Bucket - 39930 N (8977 lbf)
With Long Arm Arm - 25580 N (5751 lbf)
Bucket - 39930 N (8977 lbf)
Boom Swing Left 75° Right 50°

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Controls

Steering Two hand levers (optional foot pedals)

Hydraulics Two hand operated levers (joysticks) control boom, bucket, arm and
upperstructure slew
Blade Hand lever
Angle Blade (If Equipped) Switch on blade lever
Two-Speed Switch on blade lever
Boom Switch Electric switch in left joystick
Auxiliary Hydraulics Electric switch in right joystick
Auxiliary Pressure Release Electric switch in right joystick - Standard Instrument Panel
Display Panel Button - Deluxe Instrument panel
Engine Engine speed control dial with auto idle feature, key type start switch
Starting Aid Glow Plugs - activated by key switch
Brakes
Travel
Service & Parking Hydraulic lock in motor circuit
Swing
Service Hydraulic lock on motor
Holding Spring applied - hydraulic release

236 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

236 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)
Engine

Make / Model Kubota V2403-M-DI-TE3B-BC-4

Fuel / Cooling Diesel / Liquid
Horsepower (SAE Net) @ 2200 RPM 35,4 kW (47.5 hp)
Torque @ 1200 RPM (SAE Net) 179,5 N•m (132.4 ft-lb)
Number Of Cylinders 4
Displacement 2,433 L (148.5 in3)
Bore / Stroke 87,1 x 102,4 mm (3.43 x 4.03 in)
Lubrication Pressure System with Filter
Crankcase Ventilation Closed Breathing
Air Cleaner Dry replaceable paper dual cartridge
Ignition Diesel-Compression
Low Idle Speed 1200 rpm +/- 75 rpm
High Idle Speed 2450 rpm
Engine Coolant Propylene Glycol / water mixture (53% PG / 47% water)

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

237 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

237 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Hydraulic System

Pump Type Engine driven, single outlet, variable displacement,

load sensing, torque limited, piston pump
Pump Capacity 
Piston Pump 138,5 Lpm (36.6 gpm)
Auxiliary Flow (Aux3) 75,7 Lpm (20.0 gpm)
Auxiliary Flow - 2nd Aux
S/N: AHHE14000 - AHHE14775
Equipped with non-angle blade
(Female Coupler) 26,4 L/min (7.0 US gpm)
(Male Coupler) 21,0 L/min (5.5 US gpm)
Auxiliary Flow - 2nd Aux
S/N: AHHE1400 - AHHE14771
Equipped with angle blade
(Female Coupler) 26,4 L/min (7.0 US gpm)
(Male Coupler) 21,0 L/min (5.5 US gpm)
Auxiliary Flow - 2nd Aux
S/N: AHHE14776 & Above
Equipped with non-angle blade

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

(Female Coupler) 45,4 L/min (12.0 US gpm)
(Male Coupler) 34,1 L/min (9.0 US gpm)
Auxiliary Flow - 2nd Aux
S/N: AHHE14772 & Above
Equipped with angle blade
(Female Coupler) 45,4 L/min (12.0 US gpm)
(Male Coupler) 34,1 L/min (9.0 US gpm)
Hydraulic Filter Full flow replaceable, 3 micron synthetic media element
Control Valve closed center, individually compensated
Fluid Type Bobcat Fluid, Hydraulic / Hydrostatic
6903117 - (2.5 U.S. gal)
6903118 - (5 U.S. gal)
6903119 - (55 U.S. gal)
System Relief Pressure
Slew Circuit 24097 kPa (241 bar) (3495 psi)
Boom, Blade, Arm, Bucket, Boom
Swing, Auxiliary  25580 kPa (256 bar) (3710 psi)
Joystick Control Pressure 2999 kPa (30 bar) (435 psi)
Auxiliary Port Relief, Male And Female
Couplers 20995 kPa (210 bar) (3045 psi)
Arm Port Relief, Base End And Rod End 28999 kPa (290 bar) (4206 psi)
Boom Port Relief, Base End
And Rod End 28999 kPa (290 bar) (4206 psi)
Bucket Port Relief Base End
And Rod End 28999 kPa (290 bar) (4206 psi)
Blade Port Relief Base End
And Rod End 26000 kPa (260 bar) (3771 psi)
Angle Blade (If Equipped) Port Relief
Base End And Rod End 27000 kPa (270 bar) (3916 psi)
Main Hydraulic Filter Bypass 345 kPa (3,5 bar) (50 psi)
Case Drain 172 kPa (1,7 bar) (25 psi)

238 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

238 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Hydraulic Cylinders

Cylinder Bore Rod Stroke

Boom (cushion up) 101,6 mm (4.00 in) 57,1 mm (2.25 in) 697 mm (27.45 in)
Arm (cushion retract / 88,9 mm (3.50 in) 57,1 mm (2.25 in) 757 mm (29.82 in)
extend)
Bucket 82,6 mm (3.25 in) 50,8 mm (2.00 in) 524 mm (20.63 in)
Boom Swing 95,2 mm (3.75 in) 50,8 mm (2.00 in) 491 mm (19.32 in)
Blade 101,6 mm (4.00 in) 50,8 mm (2.00 in) 195 mm (7.68 in)
Angle Blade (If equipped) 63,5 mm (2.50 in) 38,1 mm (1.50 in) 423 mm (16.65 in)

Hydraulic Cycle Times

Bucket Curl 2.6 Seconds

Bucket Dump 1.8 Seconds
Arm Retract 3.1 Seconds
Arm Extend 3.1 Seconds
Boom Raise 4.8 Seconds

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

Boom Lower 4.6 Seconds
Boom Swing Left AG3N14000 - AG3N14520 AG3N14521 AND ABOVE
8.8 Seconds 4.4 Seconds
Boom Swing Right AG3N14000 - AG3N14520 AG3N14521 AND ABOVE
8.1 Seconds 4.6 Seconds
Blade Raise 3.1 Seconds
Blade Lower 2.7 Seconds
Angle Blade Left (If equipped) 1.8 Seconds
Angle Blade Right (If equipped) 1.8 Seconds

Drive System

Final Drive Each track is driven by hydrostatic axial piston motor

Type of Reduction 56.4:1 two stage planetary

Slew System

Slew Motor Axial piston connected to a planetary drive

Slew Circle Single row shear type ball bearing with internal gear
Slew Speed 9.0 rpm

Undercarriage

Crawler Track Design Sealed track rollers with boxed section track roller frame,
grease type track adjuster with shock absorbing recoil spring
Width of crawler 1960 mm (77.2 in)

239 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

239 of 246
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS (CONT’D)

Electrical

Starting Aid Glow Plugs

Alternator 12 volt, 90 Amp open frame w / internal regulator
Battery 12 volt - 540 CCA @ -18°C (0°F)
Starter 12 volt; gear reduction 2.0 kW (2.7 hp)
Lights 37.5 watt (2)
Instrumentation Gauges:
Engine Coolant Temperature, Fuel Level.
Warning lights:
Fuel Level, Seat Belt, Engine Coolant Temperature, Engine Malfunction,
Hydraulic System Malfunction, General Warning.
Indicators:
Two-Speed, Engine Preheat.
Data Display:
Operating Hours, Engine rpm, Maintenance Clock Countdown, Battery Voltage,
Service Codes, Engine Preheat.
Other:
Audible Alarm, Lights.
Optional Deluxe Instrumentation Panel:

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

*Additional displays for: Engine rpm, Coolant Temperature and Oil Pressure;
System Voltage and Hydraulic Oil Temperature.
*Additional Features Included: Keyless Start, Digital Clock, Job Clock, Password
Lockout, Multi-language Display, Help Screens, Diagnostic Capability and
Engine / Hydraulic Systems Shutdown Function.

Capacities

Fuel Tank 79,9 L (21.1 U.S. gal)

Hydraulic Reservoir Only (Center of
Sight Glass) Tank Cap. 15,1 L (4.0 U.S. gal)
Hydraulic System (with Reservoir) 54,9 L (14.5 U.S. gal)
Cooling System 8,3 L (2.2 U.S. gal)
Engine Oil and Filter 7,1 L (7.5 qt)
Final Drive (each) 1,0 L (1.1 qt)
Air Conditioning Refrigerant (R-134a) 0,77 kg (1.7 lb)

Tracks

Type Rubber Steel

Width 400 mm (15.7 in) 400 mm (15.7 in)
Number Of Shoes Single Assembly 39
Number of Track Rollers (per side) 5 5

Ground Pressure

Rubber Tracks - Standard Arm 27,2 kPa (0,272 bar) (3.95 psi)
Long Arm 27,9 kPa (0,280 bar) (4.05 psi)
Steel Tracks - Standard Arm 28,5 kPa (0,285 bar) (4.14 psi)
Long Arm 29,3 kPa (0,293 bar) (4.25 psi)

240 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

240 of 246
 WARRANTY

WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

241 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

241 of 246
WARRANTY

WARRANTY
Bobcat Excavators

Bobcat Company warrants to its authorized dealers and authorized dealers of Bobcat Equipment Ltd.,
who in turn warrant to the owner, that each new Bobcat excavator will be free from proven defects in
material and workmanship with respect to (i) all components of the product except as otherwise
specified herein for twelve (12) months, (ii) tracks for twelve (12) months on a prorated basis based on
the remaining depth of the track at the time any defect is discovered, (iii) Bobcat brand batteries, for an
additional twelve (12) months after the initial twelve month warranty period, provided that Bobcat
Company shall only reimburse a fixed portion of the cost of replacing the battery during such
additional twelve months and (iv) auxiliary hydraulic quick couplers for six (6) months or 200 hours,
whichever occurs first. For new Bobcat excavators sold in the United States or Canada that are
equipped with Bobcat Engines, the engine is covered for an additional twelve (12) months after the
initial twelve (12) month warranty period, or a total of 2000 hours, whichever occurs first, will apply on
machines with a delivery date on or after January 1, 2018. The foregoing time periods shall all
commence after delivery by the authorized Bobcat dealer to the original buyer.

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

During the warranty period, the authorized Bobcat dealer shall repair or replace, at Bobcat Company’s
option, without charge for parts and labor, any part of the Bobcat product except as otherwise
specified herein which fails because of defects in material or workmanship. The owner shall provide
the authorized Bobcat dealer with prompt written notice of the defect and allow reasonable time for
repair or replacement. Bobcat Company may, at its option, require failed parts to be returned to the
factory. Travel time of mechanics and transportation of the Bobcat product to the authorized Bobcat
dealer for warranty work are the responsibility of the owner. The remedies provided in this warranty are
exclusive.

This warranty does not cover replacement of scheduled service items such as oil, filters, tune-up parts,
and other high-wear items. This warranty does not cover damages resulting from abuse, accidents,
alterations, use of the Bobcat product with any accessory or attachment not approved by Bobcat
Company, air flow obstructions, or failure to maintain or use the Bobcat product according to the
instructions applicable to it.

THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXCEPT THE WARRANTY OF TITLE. BOBCAT COMPANY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL BOBCAT
COMPANY OR THE AUTHORIZED BOBCAT DEALER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS
OR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, LOST PROFITS, OR LOSS OF MACHINE USE, WHETHER BASED
ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, STATUTE OR OTHERWISE,
EVEN IF BOBCAT COMPANY OR THE AUTHORIZED BOBCAT DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF BOBCAT COMPANY AND THE
AUTHORIZED BOBCAT DEALERS WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT AND SERVICES FURNISHED
HEREUNDER SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT UPON WHICH SUCH
LIABILITY IS BASED.

7345540enUS (02-18) (0) Printed in U.S.A.

242 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

242 of 246
WARRANTY (CONT’D)

In this emissions limited warranty, the term “Manufacturer” means Kubota Corporation as the holder of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency (U.S. EPA) Certificate of Conformity and California Executive Order for the vehicle. The emission control limited
warranty is in addition to the standard limited warranty for your vehicle.
Your Bobcat dealer is authorized to perform all warranty and service repairs on your diesel engine. To locate a Bobcat dealer, visit
www.bobcat.com or call 1-800-743-4340.

KUBOTA Corporation
FEDERAL & CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
LIMITED WARRANTY for NON-ROAD ENGINES (CI)
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the California Air Resources Board (CARB), and KUBOTA Corporation are pleased to explain the Federal and
California Emission Control System Warranty on your non-road engine. In California, new heavy duty off-road engines must be designed, built and equipped to meet
California’s stringent anti-smog standards adopted by the Air Resources Board pursuant to its authority in Chapter 1 and 2, Part 5, Division 26 of the California Health
and Safety Code. In other states of the U.S.A., new non-road engines subject to the provisions of 40 CFR 1039 subpart A must be designed, built and equipped, at the
time of sale, to meet the U.S. EPA regulations for nonroad engines.
KUBOTA must warrant the emission control system on your Compression Ignition engine for the period of time listed below provided there has been no abuse,
vandalism, neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications to your engine. This emission warranty is applicable in all states of the U.S.A., its provinces and
territories regardless of whether an individual state, province, or territory has enacted warranty provisions that differ from the Federal warranty provisions. This emission
warranty is also applicable in all provinces and territories of CANADA.
Your emission control system may include parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system. Also included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other
emission-related assemblies.
Where a warrantable condition exists, KUBOTA will repair your engine at no cost to you, including diagnosis (if the diagnostic work is performed at an authorized dealer),
parts and labor.
EMISSION DESIGN AND DEFECT WARRANTY COVERAGE
The emissions warranty period for the engine begins on the original date of sale to the initial purchaser and continues for each subsequent purchaser for the period
mentioned below.
The emissions warranty period for all engines rated under 19kW (25Hp) is 2000 hours of operation or two (2) years of use, whichever first occurs.
The emissions warranty period for constant speed engines rated under 37kW (50Hp) with rated speeds greater than or equal to 3000 rpm is 2000 hours of operation
or two (2) years of use, whichever first occurs.
The emissions warranty period for all other engines not already listed is 3000 hours of operation or five (5) years of use, whichever first occurs.
If any emission related part on your engine is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by KUBOTA free of charge.
OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES
(a) As the engine owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance listed in your KUBOTA operator’s manual. KUBOTA recommends

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

that you retain all receipts covering maintenance on your engine, but KUBOTA cannot deny a warranty claim solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to
ensure the performance of all scheduled maintenance.
(b) As the engine owner, you should be aware, however, that KUBOTA may deny your warranty coverage if your engine or a part has failed due to abuse, vandalism,
neglect, improper maintenance or unapproved modifications.
(c) Your engine is designed to operate on Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel only. Use of any other fuel may result in your engine no longer operating in compliance with
Federal or California’s emissions requirements.
(d) You are responsible for presenting your engine to the nearest dealer or service station authorized by KUBOTA when a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.
(e) If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities or the location of the nearest authorized dealer or distributor, you should contact:
KUBOTA ENGINE AMERICA CORPORATION, Service department at 1-800-532-9808, [email protected] or KUBOTA TRACTOR CORPORATION,
National Service Department at 1-800-558-2682, [email protected] or KUBOTA CANADA LTD at (905) 294-7477.
COVERAGE
KUBOTA warrants to the initial purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that your engine will be designed, built and equipped, at the time of sale, to meet all
applicable regulations. KUBOTA also warrants to the initial purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that your engine shall be free from defects in materials and
workmanship which cause the engine to fail to conform to applicable regulations for the period mentioned above from the original date of sale.
KUBOTA shall remedy warranty defects at any authorized KUBOTA engine dealer or warranty station. Any authorized work done at an authorized dealer or warranty
station shall be free of charge to the owner if such work determines that a warranted part is defective. Any KUBOTA approved or equivalent replacement part
(including any KUBOTA approved aftermarket part) may be used for any warranty maintenance or repairs on emission related parts, and must be provided free of
charge to the owner if the part is still under warranty.
KUBOTA is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure of a warranted part still under warranty. The use of replacement parts not
equivalent to the original parts may impair the effectiveness of your engine emission control system. If such a replacement part is used in the repair or maintenance
of your engine, and KUBOTA determines it is defective or causes a failure of a warranted part, your claim for repair of your engine may be denied.
Listed below are the parts covered by the Federal and California Emission Control Systems Warranty. Some parts listed below may require scheduled maintenance
and are warranted up to the first scheduled replacement point for that part. The warranted parts are (if applicable):
1) Air-Induction System 4) Electronic Control System 6) Particulate Controls
a) Intake Manifold a) ECU a) Any device used to capture particulate
b) Turbocharger System b) Engine Speed / Timing Sensor emissions.
c) Charge Air Cooling System (Intercooler) c) Accelerator Position Sensor b) Any device used in the regeneration of the
2) Catalyst or Thermal Reactor System d) Coolant Temperature Sensor particulate control device.
a) Catalytic converter e) Atmospheric Pressure Sensor c) Control Device Enclosures and Manifolding
b) Exhaust manifold f) Intake Pressure Sensor d) Diesel Particulate Filter Temperature Sensor
3) Fuel Injection System g) Intake Manifold Temperature Sensor e) Differential Pressure Sensor
a) Fuel Supply Pump h) Intake Air Flow Sensor 7) Miscellaneous Items
b) Injector i) Common Rail Pressure Sensor a) Closed Breather System
c) Injection Pipe 5) Exhaust Gas Recirculation System b) Hoses*, Clamps*, Fittings, Tubing*
d) Common Rail a) EGR Valve c) Gaskets, Seals
e) Smoke Puff Limiter b) EGR Cooler d) Kubota supplied engine Wiring Harnesses
f) Speed Timer c) EGR Valve Opening Rate Sensor e) Kubota supplied engine Elec. Connectors
g) Cold Advance Timer f) Air Cleaner Element*, Fuel Filter Element*
h) Injection Pump g) Emission Control Information Labels
*Warranty period is equivalent to manufacturer’s recommended first replacement interval as stated in the applicable model’s operator’s manual and/or service
(workshop) manual.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
The owner is responsible for the performance of the required maintenance as defined by KUBOTA in the operator’s manual.
LIMITATIONS
This Emission Control System Warranty shall not cover any of the following;
(a) Repair or replacement required because of misuse or neglect, improper maintenance, repairs improperly performed or replacements not conforming to
KUBOTA specifications that adversely affect performance and/or durability, and alteration or modifications not recommended or approved in writing by
KUBOTA.
(b) Replacement of parts and other services and adjustments necessary for required maintenance at and after the first scheduled replacement point.

6990354 (10-11) Printed in U.S.A.

243 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

243 of 246
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

AIR CLEANER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 MACHINE SIGNS (DECALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR BELT MAINTENANCE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 MAINTENANCE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ALTERNATOR BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 MONITORING THE DISPLAY PANELS . . . . 68
ARM LOAD HOLDING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . 58 MOTION ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 MOTION ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
BLADE CONTROL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
BOBCAT COMPANY IS IS0 9001 CERTIFIED OPERATOR CAB (ROPS / TOPS) . . . . . . . . 34
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
OPERATOR CANOPY (ROPS / TOPS) . . . . 34
BOOM LOAD HOLDING VALVE . . . . . . . . . 56
OPERATOR SAFETY WARNING . . . . . . . . . .2
BOOM SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
OVERLOAD WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BUCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
PASSWORD SETUP (DELUXE INSTRUMENT
CAB FILTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
CONTROL CONSOLE LOCKOUTS . . . . . . 138 PASSWORD SETUP (KEYLESS START
CONTROL PANEL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 PANEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CUTTING EDGE (ANGLE BLADE ONLY) . 177 PIN GRABBER QUICK COUPLER . . . . . . 175
DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 PIVOT PINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale

DELIVERY REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PRE-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 61
DEPTH CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 PUBLICATIONS AND TRAINING
DIAGNOSTIC SERVICE CODES . . . . . . . . 184 RESOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 REGULAR MAINTENANCE ITEMS . . . . . . . .5
EMERGENCY EXIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 RIGHT SIDE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 154 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . 152 SEAT BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
ENGINE SPEED CONTROL DIAL . . . . . . . . 54 SERIAL NUMBER LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .6
EXCAVATOR IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
EXCAVATOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . 232 SPARK ARRESTER MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . 167
EXCAVATOR STORAGE AND RETURN TO STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 STOPPING THE ENGINE AND LEAVING THE
FEATURES, ACCESSORIES AND EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TOWING THE EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 TRACK ROLLER AND IDLER LUBRICATION
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
CONDITIONING (HVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 TRACK TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 TRANSPORTING THE EXCAVATOR ON A
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 TRAILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
INSTRUMENTS AND CONSOLES . . . . . . . 23 TRAVEL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
INTENDED USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 TRAVEL MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
LIFTING THE EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
LUBRICATION OF THE HYDRAULIC X-CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
EXCAVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
MACHINE SIGN TRANSLATIONS . . . . . . . 200

244 E50 Operation & Maintenance Manual

244 of 246
245 of 246
Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
 Dealer Copy -- Not for Resale
WARNING: Cancer and Reproductive Harm.

For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

WARNING: Breathing diesel engine exhaust exposes you to chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
• Always start and operate the engine in a well-ventilated area.
• If in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside.
• Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system.
• Do not idle the engine except as necessary.
For more information go to www.P65warnings.ca.gov/diesel.

Bobcat®, the Bobcat logo and the colors of the Bobcat machine are registered trademarks of
Bobcat Company in the United States and various other countries.
246 of 246